Sie sind auf Seite 1von 207

Bridge Superstructure Design

AASHTO 2002/LRFD 2007


CSiBridge®
Bridge Superstructure Design
AASHTO 2002 and
AASHTO LRFD 2007

ISO BRG102816M6 Rev. 0


Proudly developed in the United States of America October 2016
Copyright

Copyright  Computers & Structures, Inc., 1978-2016


All rights reserved.

The CSI Logo® and CSiBridge® are registered trademarks of Computers & Structures,
Inc. Watch & LearnTM is a trademark of Computers & Structures, Inc. Adobe and
Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorported. AutoCAD is a
registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

The computer program CSiBridge® and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers & Structures,
Inc. Unlicensed use of these programs or reproduction of documentation in any form,
without prior written authorization from Computers & Structures, Inc., is explicitly
prohibited.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any


means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior explicit written
permission of the publisher.

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers & Structures, Inc.


www.csiamerica.com

info@csiamerica.com (for general information)


support@csiamerica.com (for technical support)
DISCLAIMER

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE


DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING OF THIS SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, THE USER
ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY
OR THE RELIABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT.
THIS PRODUCT IS A PRACTICAL AND POWERFUL TOOL FOR STRUCTURAL
DESIGN. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE BASIC
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE MODELING, ANALYSIS, AND DESIGN
ALGORITHMS AND COMPENSATE FOR THE ASPECTS THAT ARE NOT
ADDRESSED.
THE INFORMATION PRODUCED BY THE SOFTWARE MUST BE CHECKED BY
A QUALIFIED AND EXPERIENCED ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER MUST
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS AND TAKE PROFESSIONAL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INFORMATION THAT IS USED.
Contents

Bridge Superstructure Design


1 Introduction

1.1 Organization 1-2

1.2 Recommended Reading/Practice 1-2

2 Define Loads and Load Combinations

2.1 Load Pattern Types 2-1

2.2 Design Load Combinations 2-3

2.3 Default Load Combinations 2-5

3 Live Load Distribution

3.1 Methods for Determining Live Load Distribution 3-1

3.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors 3-2

3.3 Apply LLD Factors 3-3

3.3.1 User Specified 3-4

i
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

3.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance


with AASHTO LFRD 3-4
3.3.3 Forces Read Directly from Girders 3-4
3.3.4 Uniformly Distribution to Girders 3-4

3.4 Generate Virtual Combinations 3-5


3.4.1 Stress Check 3-5
3.4.2 Shear or Moment Check 3-6

3.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders 3-6

3.5.1 Stress Check 3-6


3.5.2 Shear or Moment Check 3-6

3.6 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-7

4 Define a Bridge Design Request

4.1 Name and Bridge Object 4-4

4.2 Check Type 4-4

4.3 Station Range 4-6

4.4 Design Parameters 4-6

4.5 Demand Sets 4-18

4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors 4-18

5 Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

5.1 Stress Design AASHTO STD-2002 5-2


5.1.1 Capacity Parameters 5-2
5.1.2 Demand Parameters 5-2
5.1.3 Algorithm 5-2

5.2 Stress Design AASHTO LFRD-2007 5-3


5.2.1 Capacity Parameters 5-3
5.2.2 Algorithm 5-3
5.2.3 Stress Design Example 5-4

ii
Contents

5.3 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-6


5.3.1 Capacity Parameters 5-6
5.3.2 Variables 5-6
5.3.3 Design Process 5-7
5.3.4 Algorithm 5-8
5.3.5 Flexure Design Example 5-10

5.4 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-15


5.4.1 Capacity Parameters 5-15
5.4.2 Variables 5-16
5.4.3 Design Process 5-17
5.4.4 Algorithm 5-19

5.5 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-24

5.5.1 Capacity Parameters 5-24


5.5.2 Demand Parameters 5-25
5.5.3 Algorithm 5-25

6 Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

6.1 Stress Design 6-2

6.2 Shear Design 6-3

6.2.1 Variables 6-4


6.2.2 Design Process 6-5
6.2.3 Algorithms 6-7

6.3 Flexure Design 6-11

6.3.1 Variables 6-11


6.3.2 Design Process 6-13
6.3.3 Algorithms 6-13

7 Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

7.1 Stress Design 7-1

7.2 Shear Design 7-2


7.2.1 Variables 7-4

iii
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

7.2.2 Design Process 7-5


7.2.3 Algorithms 7-6
7.2.4 Shear Design Example 7-11

7.3 Flexure Design 7-16

7.3.1 Variables 7-17


7.3.2 Design Process 7-18
7.3.3 Algorithms 7-18
7.3.4 Flexure Capacity Design Example 7-21

8 Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

8.1 Section Properties 8-1

8.1.1 Yield Moments 8-1


8.1.2 Plastic Moments 8-3
8.1.3 Section Classification and Factors 8-7

8.2 Demand Sets 8-11


8.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff 8-12
8.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending
Stress f1 8-14
8.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression 8-14
8.2.4 Moment Gradient Modifier Cb 8-15

8.3 Strength Design Request 8-16

8.3.1 Flexure 8-16


8.3.2 Shear 8-23

8.4 Service Design Request 8-26

8.5 Fatigue Design Request 8-28

8.5.1 Web Fatigue 8-28


8.5.2 Flange Fatigue 8-29

8.6 Constructability Design Request 8-29


8.6.1 Staged (Steel I Comp Construct Stgd) 8-29
8.6.2 Non-staged (Steel I Comp Construct
NonStgd) 8-30

iv
Contents

8.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length 8-30


8.6.4 Flexure 8-31
8.6.5 Shear 8-32

8.7 Section Optimization 8-35

9 Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

9.1 Section Properties 9-1


9.1.1 Yield Moments 9-1
9.1.2 Plastic Moments 9-2
9.1.3 Section Classification and Factors 9-7

9.2 Demand Sets 9-9

9.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff 9-10


9.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending
Stress f1 9-11
9.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression 9-12

9.3 Strength Design Request 9-13


9.3.1 Flexure 9-13
9.3.2 Shear 9-16

9.4 Service Design Request 9-19

9.5 Web Fatigue Design Request 9-20

9.6 Constructability Design Request 9-22


9.6.1 Staged (Steel-U Comp Construct Stgd) 9-22
9.6.2 Non-staged (Steel-U Comp Construct NonStgd) 9-22
9.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length 9-22
9.6.4 Flexure 9-23
9.6.5 Shear 9-27

9.7 Section Optimization 9-30

10 Run a Bridge Design Request

10.1 Description of Example Model 10-2

v
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

10.2 Design Preferences 10-3

10.3 Load Combinations 10-3

10.4 Bridge Design Request 10-5

10.5 Start Design/Check of the Bridge 10-6

11 Display Bridge Design Results

11.1 Display Results as a Plot 11-1


11.1.1 Additional Display Examples 11-2

11.2 Display Data Tables 11-7

11.3 Advanced Report Writer 11-8

11.4 Verification 11-11

Bibliography

vi
Chapter 1
Introduction

As the ultimate versatile, integrated tool for modeling, analysis, and design of
bridge structures, CSiBridge can apply appropriate code-specific design pro-
cesses to concrete box girder bridge design, design when the superstructure in-
cludes Precast Concrete Box bridges with a composite slab and steel I-beam
bridges with composite slabs. The ease with which these tasks can be accom-
plished makes CSiBridge the most productive bridge design package in the in-
dustry.

Design using CSiBridge is based on load patterns, load cases, load combina-
tions and design requests. The design output can then be displayed graphically
and printed using a customized reporting format.

It should be noted that the design of bridge superstructure is a complex subject


and the design codes cover many aspects of this process. CSiBridge is a tool to
help the user with that process. Only the aspects of design documented in this
manual are automated by the CSiBridge design capabilities. The user must
check the results produced and address other aspects not covered by
CSiBridge.

1-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

1.1 Organization
This manual is designed to help you become productive using CSiBridge de-
sign in accordance with the available codes when modeling concrete box girder
bridges and precast concrete girder bridges. Chapter 2 describes code-specific
design prerequisites. Chapter 3 describes Live Load Distribution Factors.
Chapter 4 describes defining the design request, which includes the design re-
quest name, a bridge object name (i.e., the bridge model), check type (i.e., the
type of design), station range (i.e., portion of the bridge to be designed), design
parameters (i.e., overwrites for default parameters) and demand sets (i.e., load-
ing combinations). Chapter 5 identifies code-specific algorithms used by
CSiBridge in completing concrete box girder bridges. Chapter 6 provides code-
specific algorithms used by CSiBridge in completing concrete box and multi-
cell box girder bridges. Chapter 7 describes code-specific design parameters for
precast I and U girder. Chapter 8 explains how to design and optimize a steel I-
beam bridge with composite slab. Chapter 9 describes how to design and opti-
mize a steel U-beam bridge with composite slab. Chapter 10 describes how to
run a Design Request using an example that applies the AASHTO LRFD 2007
code, and Chapter 11 describes design output for the example in Chapter 10,
which can be presented graphically as plots, in data tables, and in reports gen-
erated using the Advanced Report Writer feature.

1.2 Recommended Reading/Practice


It is strongly recommended that you read this manual and review any applica-
ble “Watch & Learn” Series™ tutorials, which are found on our web site,
http://www.csiamerica.com, before attempting to design a concrete box girder
or precast concrete bridge using CSiBridge. Additional information can be
found in the online Help facility available from within the software’s main
menu.

1-2 Organization
Chapter 2
Define Loads and Load Combinations

This chapter describes the steps that are necessary to define the loads and load
combinations that the user intends to use in the design of the bridge superstruc-
ture. The user may define the load combinations manually or have CSiBridge
automatically generate the code generated load combinations. The appropriate
design code may be selected using the Design/Rating > Superstructure De-
sign > Preference command.

When the code generated load combinations are going to be used, it is im-
portant for users to define the load pattern type in accordance with the applica-
ble code. The load pattern type can be defined using the Loads > Load Pat-
terns command. The user options for defining the load pattern types are sum-
marized in the Tables 2-1 and 2-2 for the AASHTO LRFD code.

2.1 Load Pattern Types


Tables 2-1 and 2-2 show the permanent and transient load pattern types that
can be defined in CSiBridge. The tables also show the AASHTO abbreviation
and the load pattern descriptions. Users may choose any name to identify a
load pattern type.

Load Pattern Types 2-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 2-1 PERMANENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO-LRFD 2007 Code
CSiBridge AASHTO
Load Pattern Type Reference Description of Load Pattern
CREEP CR Force effects due to creep
DOWNDRAG DD Downdrag force
DEAD DC Dead load of structural components and non-
structural attachments
SUPERDEAD DW Superimposed dead load of wearing surfaces
and utilities
BRAKING BR Vehicle braking force
HORIZ. EARTH PR EH Horizontal earth pressures
LOCKED IN EL Misc. locked-in force effects resulting from the
construction process
EARTH SURCHARGE ES Earth surcharge loads
VERT. EARTH PR EV Vertical earth pressure
PRESTRESS PS Hyperstatic forces from post-tensioning

Table 2-2 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Design Code
CSiBridge AASHTO
Load Pattern Type Reference Description of Load Pattern
BRAKING BR Vehicle braking force
CENTRIFUGAL CE Vehicular centrifugal loads
VEHICLE COLLISION CT Vehicular collision force

VESSEL COLLISION CV Vessel collision force


QUAKE EQ Earthquake
FRICTION FR Friction effects
ICE IC Ice loads
- IM Vehicle Dynamic Load Allowance
BRIDGE LL LL Vehicular live load
LL SURCHARGE LS Live load surcharge
PEDESTRIAN LL PL Pedestrian live load
SETTLEMENT SE Force effects due settlement
TEMP GRADIENT TG Temperature gradient loads
TEMPERATURE TU Uniform temperature effects
STEAM FLOW WA Water load and steam pressure
WIND–LIVE LOAD WL Wind on live load
WIND WS Wind loads on structure

2-2 Load Pattern Types


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

2.2 Design Load Combinations


The code generated design load combinations make use of the load pattern
types noted in Tables 2-1 and 2-2. Table 2-3 shows the load factors and combi-
nations that are required in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code.
Table 2-3 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code
DC
DD
DW
EH LL
EV IM
ES CE
Load EL BR LL
Combo PS PL IM
Limit CR LS CE WA WS WL FR TU TU SE EQ IC CT CV
State SH
Str I γP 1.75 - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str II γP - 1.35 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str III γP - - 1.00 1.40 - 1.00 0.5/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str IV γP - - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.5/ - - - - - -
1.20
Str V γP 1.35 - 1.00 0.40 1.00 1.00 0.5/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Ext Ev I 1.00 γEQ - 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - 1.00 - - -
Ext Ev 1.00 0.5 - 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1.00
II
Serv I 1.00 1.00 - 1.00 0.30 1.00 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv II 1.00 1.30 - 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ - - - - -
1.20
Serv III 1.00 0.80 - 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv IV 1.00 - - 1.00 0.70 - 1.00 1.00/ - 1.00 - - - -
1.20
Fatigue - 0.875 - - - - - - - - - - - -
I-LL, IM /1.75
& CE
Only
Fatigue - - 1.00 - - - - - - - - - - -
II-LL, IM

Design Load Combinations 2-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 2-4 shows the maximum and minimum factors for the permanent loads
in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code.

Table 2-4 Load Factors for Permanent Loads, γ P , AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code
Load Factor
Type of Load Maximum Minimum
DC: Components and Attachments 1.25 0.90
DC: Strength IV only 1.50 0.90
DD: Downdrag
Piles, α Tomlinson Method 1.40 0.25
Piles, λ Method 1.05 0.30
Drilled Shafts, O’Neill and Reese (1999) Method 1.25 0.35
DW: Wearing Surfaces and Utilities 1.50 0.65
EH: Horizontal Earth Pressure
Active 1.50 0.90
At-Rest 1.35 0.90
AEP for Anchored Walls 1.35 N/A
EL: Locked in Construction Stresses 1.00 1.00
EV: Vertical Earth Pressure
Overall Stability 1.00 N/A
Retaining Walls and Abutments 1.35 1.00
Rigid Buried Structure 1.30 0.90
Rigid Frames 1.35 0.90
Flexible Buried Structures other than Metal Box 1.95 0.90
Culverts
1.50 0.90
Flexible Metal Box Culverts
ES: Earth Surcharge 1.50 0.75

Table 2-5 Load Factors for Permanent Loads due to Superimposed Deformations, γP,
AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code

Bridge Component PS CR, SH


Superstructures, Segmental 1.0 See Table 2-5,
Concrete Substructures supporting Segmental Super- DC
structures
Concrete Superstructures, non-segmental 1.0 1.0
Substructures supporting non-segmental Superstruc-
tures
Using Ig 0.5 0.5
Using Ieffective

2-4 Design Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Table 2-5 Load Factors for Permanent Loads due to Superimposed Deformations, γP,
AASHTO LRFD 2007 Code

Bridge Component PS CR, SH


1.0 1.0
Steel Substructures 1.0 1.0

Two combinations for each permanent load pattern are required because of the
maximum and minimum factors. When the default load combinations are used,
CSiBridge automatically creates both load combinations (one for the maximum
and one for the minimum factor), and then automatically creates a third combi-
nation that represents an enveloped combination of the max/min combos.

2.3 Default Load Combinations


Default design load combinations can be activated using the Design/Rating >
Load Combinations > Add Default command. Users can set the load combi-
nations by selecting the “Bridge” option. Users may select the desired limit
states and load cases using the Code Generated Load Combinations for Bridge
Design form. The form shown in Figure 2-1 illustrates the options when the
AASHTO LRFD 2007 code has been selected for design.

Default Load Combinations 2-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 2-1 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design Form –


AASHTO LRFD

After the desired limit states and load cases have been selected, CSiBridge will
generate all of the code-required load combinations. These can be viewed us-
ing the Home > Display > Show Tables command or by using the
Show/Modify button on the Define Combinations form, which is shown in
Figure 2-2.

2-6 Default Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Figure 2-2 Define Load Combinations Form – AASHTO LRFD

The load combinations denoted as Str-I1, Str-I2, and so forth refer to Strength I
load combinations. The load case StrIGroup1 is the name given to enveloped
load combination of all of the Strength I combinations. Enveloped load combi-
nations will allow for some efficiency later when the bridge design requests are
defined (see Chapter 4).

Default Load Combinations 2-7


Chapter 3
Live Load Distribution

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge to determine the live
load distribution factors used to assign live load demands to individual girders.
An explanation is given with respect to how the distribution factors are applied
in a shear, stress, and moment check.

The live load distribution factors derived using the code-based Method 2 de-
scribed in Section 3.1 of this manual are applicable only to superstructures of
the following types: precast I- or U-girders with composite slabs, steel I-girders
with composite slabs, and multi-cell concrete box girders. These deck section
types may also have the live loads distributed based on Methods 1, 3 or 4 de-
scribed in Section 3.1 of this manual.

Legend:
Girder = beam + tributary area of composite slab
Section Cut = all girders present in the cross-section at the cut location
LLD = Live Load Distribution

3.1 Methods for Determining Live Load Distribution


CSiBridge gives the user a choice of four methods to address distribution of
live load to individual girders.

Method 1 – The LLD factors are specified directly by the user.

3-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Method 2 – CSiBridge calculates the LLD factors by following procedures out-


lined in AASHTO LRFD Section 4.6.2.2.

Method 3 – CSiBridge reads the calculated live load demands directly from in-
dividual girders (available only for Area models).

Method 4 – CSiBridge distributes the live load uniformly to all girders.

It is important to note that to obtain relevant results, the definition of a Moving


Load case must be adjusted depending on which method is selected.

 When the LLD factors are user specified or specified in accordance with the
code (Method 1 or 2), only one lane with a MultiLane Scale Factor = 1
should be loaded into a Moving Load cases included in the demand set com-
binations.

 When CSiBridge reads the LLD factors directly from individual girders
(Method 3, applicable to area and solid models only) or when CSiBridge ap-
plies the LLD factors uniformly (Method 4), multiple traffic lanes with rele-
vant Multilane Scale Factors should be loaded in accordance with code re-
quirements.

3.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors


At every section cut, the following geometric information is evaluated to de-
termine the LLD factors.

 span lengththe length of span for which moment or shear is being calculat-
ed

 the number of girders

 girder designationthe first and last girder are designated as exterior girders
and the other girders are classified as interior girders

 roadway widthmeasured as the distance between curbs/barriers; medians


are ignored

3-2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

 overhangconsists of the horizontal distance from the centerline of the exte-


rior web of the left exterior beam at deck level to the interior edge of the curb
or traffic barrier

 the beamsincludes the area, moment of inertia, torsion constant, center of


gravity

 the thickness of the composite slab t1 and the thickness of concrete slab
haunch t2

 the tributary area of the composite slabwhich is bounded at the interior


girder by the midway distances to neighboring girders and at the exterior
girder; includes the entire overhang on one side, and is bounded by the mid-
way distances to neighboring girder on the other side

 Young’s modulus for both the slab and the beamsangle of skew support.

CSiBridge then evaluates the longitudinal stiffness parameter, Kg, in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2 (eq. 4.6.2.2.1-1). The center of gravity of
the composite slab measured from the bottom of the beam is calculated as the
sum of the beam depth, thickness of the concrete slab haunch t2, and one-half
the thickness of the composite slab t1. Spacing of the girders is calculated as
the average distance between the centerlines of neighboring girders.

CSiBridge then verifies that the selected LLD factors are compatible with the
type of model: spine, area, or solid. If the LLD factors are read by CSiBridge
directly from the individual girders, the model type must be area or solid. This
is the case because with the spine model option, CSiBridge models the entire
cross section as one frame element and there is no way to extract forces on in-
dividual girders. All other model types and LLD factor method permutations
are allowed.

3.3 Apply LLD Factors


The application of live load distribution factors varies, depending on which
method has been selected: user specified; in accordance with code; directly
from individual girders; or uniformly distributed onto all girders.

Apply LLD Factors 3-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

3.3.1 User Specified


When this method is selected, CSiBridge reads the girder designations (i.e., ex-
terior and interior) and assigns live load distribution factors to the individual
girders accordingly.

3.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance with AASHTO


LRFD
When this method is selected, CSiBridge considers the data input by the user
for truck wheel spacing, minimum distance from wheel to curb/barrier and
multiple presence factor for one loaded lane.

Depending on the section type, CSiBridge validates several section parameters


against requirements specified in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables 4.6.2.2.2b-
1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1, 4.6.2.2.3a-1 and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). When any of the parameter val-
ues are outside the range required by the code, the section cut is excluded from
the Design Request.

At every section cut, CSiBridge then evaluates the live load distribution factors
for moment and shear for exterior and interior girders using formulas specified
in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables 4.6.2.2.2b-1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1, 4.6.2.2.3a-1
and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). After evaluation, the LLD factor values are assigned to indi-
vidual girders based on their designation (exterior, interior). The same value
equal to the average of the LLD factors calculated for the left and right girders
is assigned to both exterior girders. Similarly, all interior girders use the same
LLD factors equal to the average of the LLD factors of all of the individual in-
terior girders.

3.3.3 Forces Read Directly from Girders


When this method is selected, CSiBridge sets the live load distribution factor
for all girders to 1.

3.3.4 Uniformly Distributed to Girders


When this method is selected, the live load distribution factor is equal to 1/n
where n is the number of girders in the section. All girders have identical LLD

3-4 Apply LLD Factors


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

factors disregarding their designation (exterior, interior) and demand type


(shear, moment).

3.4 Generate Virtual Combinations


When the method for determining the live load distribution factors is user-
specified, code-specified, or uniformly distributed (Methods 1, 2 or 4),
CSiBridge generates virtual load combination for every valid section cut se-
lected for design. The virtual combinations are used during a stress check and
check of the shear and moment to calculate the forces on the girders. After
those forces have been calculated, the virtual combinations are deleted. The
process is repeated for all section cuts selected for design.

Four virtual COMBO cases are generated for each COMBO that the user has
specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4). The program analyzes the de-
sign type of each load case present in the user specified COMBO and multi-
plies all non-moving load case types by 1/ n (where n is the number of girders)
and the moving load case type by the section cut values of the LLD factors (ex-
terior moment, exterior shear, interior moment and interior shear LLD factors).
This ensures that dead load is shared evenly by all girders, while live load is
distributed based on the LLD factors.

The program then completes a stress check and a check of the shear and the
moment for each section cut selected for design.

3.4.1 Stress Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder stresses at all stress output points
are read from CSiBridge for every virtual COMBO generated. To ensure that
live load demands are shared equally irrespective of lane eccentricity by all
girders, CSiBridge uses averaging when calculating the girder stresses. It cal-
culates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial and M3 moment demands on
all the beams in the entire section cut and dividing the demands by the number
of girders. Similarly, P and M3 forces in the composite slab are integrated and
stresses are calculated in the individual tributary areas of the slab by dividing
the total slab demand by the number of girders.

Generate Virtual Combinations 3-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

When stresses are read from analysis into design, the stresses are multiplied by
n (where n is number of girders) to make up for the reduction applied in the
Virtual Combinations.

3.4.2 Shear or Moment Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the entire section cut forces are read from
CSiBridge for every Virtual COMBO generated. The forces are assigned to in-
dividual girders based on their designation. (Forces from two virtual Combina-
tionsone for shear and one for momentgenerated for exterior beam are as-
signed to both exterior beams, and similarly, Virtual Combinations for interior
beams are assigned to interior beams.)

3.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders


When the method for determining the live load distribution is based on forces
read directly from the girders, the method varies based on which Design Check
has been specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

3.5.1 Stress Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder stresses at all stress output points
are read from CSiBridge for every COMBO specified in the Design Request.
CSiBridge calculates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial, M3 and M2
moment demands on the beam at the center of gravity of the beam. Similarly P,
M3 and M2 demands in the composite slab are integrated at the center of gravi-
ty of the slab tributary area.

3.5.2 Shear or Moment Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder forces are read from CSiBridge
for every COMBO specified in the Design Request. CSiBridge calculates the
demands on a girder by integrating axial, M3 and M2 moment demands on the
girder at the center of gravity of the girder.

3-6 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

3.6 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


The AASHTO LRFD Specifications allow the use of advanced methods of
analysis to determine the live load distribution factors. However, for typical
bridges, the specifications list equations to calculate the distribution factors for
different types of bridge superstructures. The types of superstructures covered
by these equations are described in AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.1-1. From
this table, bridges with concrete decks supported on precast concrete I or bulb-
tee girders are designated as cross-section “K.” Other tables in AASHTO
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2 list the distribution factors for interior and exterior girders in-
cluding cross-section “K.”

The distribution factor equations are largely based on work conducted in the
NCHRP Project 12-26 and have been verified to give accurate results com-
pared to 3-dimensional bridge analysis and field measurements. The multiple
presence factors are already included in the distribution factor equations except
when the tables call for the use of the lever rule. In these cases, the computa-
tions need to account for the multiple presence factors. The user is providing
those as part of the Design Request definition together with wheel spacing,
curb to wheel distance and lane width.

Notice that the distribution factor tables include a column with the heading
“range of applicability.” The ranges of applicability listed for each equation are
based on the range for each parameter used in the study leading to the devel-
opment of the equation. When any of the parameters exceeds the listed value in
the “range of applicability” column, CSiBridge reports the incompliance and
excludes the section from design.

AASHTO LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.2d of the specifications states: “In beam-slab


bridge cross-sections with diaphragms or cross-frames, the distribution factor
for the exterior beam shall not be taken less than that which would be obtained
by assuming that the cross-section deflects and rotates as a rigid cross-section.”
This provision was added to the specifications because the original study that
developed the distribution factor equations did not consider intermediate dia-
phragms. Application of this provision requires the presence of a sufficient
number of intermediate diaphragms whose stiffness is adequate to force the
cross section to act as a rigid section. For prestressed girders, different jurisdic-
tions use different types and numbers of intermediate diaphragms. Depending
on the number and stiffness of the intermediate diaphragms, the provisions of

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d may not be applicable. If the user specifies option
“Yes” in the “Diaphragms Present” option the program follows the procedure
outlined in the provision AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d.

For this example, one deep reinforced concrete diaphragm is located at the
midspan of each span. The stiffness of the diaphragm was deemed sufficient to
force the cross-section to act as a rigid section; therefore, the provisions of
AASHTO LRFD S4.6.2.2.2d apply.

Figure 3-1 General Dimensions

Required information:

AASHTO Type I-Beam (28/72)


Noncomposite beam area, Ag = 1,085 in2
Noncomposite beam moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in4
Deck slab thickness, ts = 8 in.
Span length, L = 110 ft.
Girder spacing, S = 9 ft.-8 in.
Modulus of elasticity of the beam, EB = 4,696 ksi
Modulus of elasticity of the deck, ED = 3,834 ksi
C.G. to top of the basic beam = 35.62 in.
C.G. to bottom of the basic beam = 36.38 in.

1. Calculate n, the modular ratio between the beam and the deck.

3-8 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

n = EB ED (AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.1-2)


= 4696 3834 = 1.225

2. Calculate eg, the distance between the center of gravity of the noncompo-
site beam and the deck. Ignore the thickness of the haunch in determin-
ing eg

eg = NAYT + t s 2 = 35.62 + 8 2 = 39.62 in.

3. Calculate Kg, the longitudinal stiffness parameter.

( )
Kg = n I + Aeg2 (4.6.2.2.1-1)

= 1.225 733 320 + 1 085 ( 39.62 )  =


2
2 984 704 in 4

4. Interior girder. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interior


beam with two or more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Ta-
ble S4.6.2.2.2b-1.

DM = 0.075 + ( S 9.5 ) ( S L )0.2 ( K g )


0.6 0.1
12.0 Lt s 3

{12 (110 )(8) }


0.1
= 0.075 + ( 9.667 9.5 )
0.6
( 9.667 110 )0.2 2 984 704 3


= 0.796 lane (eq. 1)

5. In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e, a skew correction factor


for moment may be applied for bridge skews greater than 30 degrees.
The bridge in this example is skewed 20 degrees, and therefore, no skew
correction factor for moment is allowed.

Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interior beam with one
design lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1.

DM = 0.06 + ( S 14 ) ( S L )0.3 ( K g )
0.4 0.1
12.0 Lt s 3

{ }
0.1
= 0.06 + ( 9.667 14 )
0.4
( 9.667 110 )0.3 2984704 12 (100 )( 8 ) 
3

 
= 0.542 lane (eq. 2)

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Notice that the distribution factor calculated above for a single lane load-
ed already includes the 1.2 multiple presence factor for a single lane,
therefore, this value may be used for the service and strength limit states.
However, multiple presence factors should not be used for the fatigue
limit state. Therefore, the multiple presence factor of 1.2 for the single
lane is required to be removed from the value calculated above to deter-
mine the factor used for the fatigue limit state.

6. Skew correction factor for shear.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c, a skew correction factor


for support shear at the obtuse corner must be applied to the distribution
factor of all skewed bridges. The value of the correction factor is calcu-
lated using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1.

( )
0.3
SC = 1.0 + 0.20 12.0 Lt s3 K g tan θ

( )
0.3
= 1.0 + 0.20 12.0 (110 )( 8 ) 2 984 704
3
tan 20

= 1.047

7. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with two or
more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.

DV = 0.2 + ( S 12 ) − ( S 35 )
2

= 0.2 + ( 9.667 12 ) − ( 9.667 35 )


2

= 0.929 lane

Apply the skew correction factor:

DV = 1.047 ( 0.929 ) = 0.973 lane (eq. 4)

8. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with one de-
sign lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.

DV = 0.36 + ( S 25.0 )

= 0.36 + ( 9.667 25.0 )

3 - 10 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

= 0.747 lane

Apply the skew correction factor:

DV = 1.047 ( 0.747 )
= 0.782 lane (eq. 5)

9. From (1) and (2), the service and strength limit state moment distribution
factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.796 and 0.542 lane.
Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.796 lane.

From (4) and (5), the service and strength limit state shear distribution
factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.973 and 0.782 lane.
Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.973 lane.

10. Exterior girder

11. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with two
or more design lanes using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1.

DM = eDVinterior
e = 0.77 + de 9.1

where de is the distance from the centerline of the exterior girder to the
inside face of the curb or barrier.

e = 0.77 + 1.83/9.1 = 0.97


DM = 0.97(0.796) = 0.772 lane (eq. (7)

12. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with one
design lane using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Ta-
ble 4.6.2.2.2d-1.

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 11


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 3-2 Lever Rule

DM = [( 3.5 + 6 ) + 3.5] 9.667 =


1.344 wheels 2

= 0.672 lane (eq. 8)

Notice that this value does not include the multiple presence factor,
therefore, it is adequate for use with the fatigue limit state. For service
and strength limit states, the multiple presence factor for a single lane
loaded needs to be included.

DM = 0.672 (1.2 )
= 0.806 lane (eq. 9) (Strength and Service)

13. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with two or
more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1.

DV = eDVinterior

3 - 12 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

where:

e = 0.6 + de 10
= 0.6 + 1.83 10

= 0.783
DV = 0.783 ( 0.973 )
= 0.762 lane (eq. 10)

14. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with one
design lane loaded using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1. This value will be the same as the moment
distribution factor with the skew correction factor applied.

DV = 1.047 ( 0.806 )
= 0.845 lane (eq. 12) (Strength and Service)

Notice that AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d includes additional requirements


for the calculation of the distribution factors for exterior girders when the
girders are connected with relatively stiff cross-frames that force the
cross-section to act as a rigid section. As indicated in the introduction,
these provisions are applied to this example; the calculations are shown
below.

15. Additional check for rigidly connected girders (AASHTO LRFD


4.6.2.2.2d)

The multiple presence factor, m, is applied to the reaction of the exterior


beam (AASHTO LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1)

m1 = 1.20
m2 = 1.00
m3 = 0.85

R = N L N b + X ext (∑ e) ∑ x 2
(4.6.2.2.2d-1)

where:

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

R = reaction on exterior beam in terms of lanes

NL = number of loaded lanes under consideration

e = eccentricity of a design truck or a design land load from


the center of gravity of the pattern of girders (ft.)

x = horizontal distance from the center of gravity of the pat-


tern of girders to each girder (ft.)

Xext = horizontal distance from the center of gravity of the pat-


tern to the exterior girder (ft.) See Figure 1 for dimen-
sions.

One lane loaded (only the leftmost lane applied):

R = 1 6 + 24.167 ( 21) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 


2 2 2

= 0.1667 + 0.310
= 0.477 (Fatigue)

Add the multiple presence factor of 1.2 for a single lane:

R = 1.2 ( 0.477 )
= 0.572 (Strength)

Two lanes loaded:

R = 2 6 + 24.167 ( 21 + 9 ) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 


2 2 2

= 0.333 + 0.443
= 0.776

Add the multiple presence factor of 1.0 for two lanes loaded:

R = 1.0 ( 0.776 )
= 0.776 (Strength)

3 - 14 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

Three lanes loaded:

R =
3 6 + 24.167 ( 21 + 9 − 3 ) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 
2 2 2

= 0.5 + 0.399
= 0.899

Add the multiple presence factor of 0.85 for three or more lanes loaded:

R = 0.85 ( 0.899 )
= 0.764 (Strength)

These values do not control over the distribution factors summarized in


Design Step 16.

16. From (7) and (9), the service and strength limit state moment distribution
factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.772 and 0.806
lane. Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.806 lane.

From (10) and (12), the service and strength limit state shear distribution
factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.762 and 0.845
lane. Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.845 lane.

Table 3.1 Summary of Service and Strength Limit State Distribution Factors --
AASHTO LRFD
Moment Moment Shear Shear
interior exterior interior exterior
Load Case beams beams beams beams
Multiple lanes load-
Distribution factors from 0.796 0.772 0.973 0.762
ed
Tables in 4.6.2.2.2
Single lane loaded 0.542 0.806 0.782 0.845
Multiple lanes load-
Additional check for rigidly NA 0.776 NA 0.776
ed
connected girders
Single lane loaded NA 0.572 NA 0.572
Design Value 0.796 0.806 0.973 0.845
Value reported by
0.796 0.807 0.973 0.845
CSiBridge

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 15


Chapter 4
Define a Bridge Design Request

This chapter describes the Bridge Design Request, which is defined using the
Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Design Requests command.

Each Bridge Design Request is unique and specifies which bridge object is to
be designed, the type of check to be performed (e.g., concrete box stress, pre-
cast composite stress, and so on), the station range (i.e., the particular zone or
portion of the bridge that is to be designed), the design parameters (i.e., param-
eters that may be used to overwrite the default values automatically set by the
program) and demand sets (i.e., the load combination[s] to be considered).
Multiple Bridge Design Requests may be defined for the same bridge object.

Before defining a design request, the applicable code should be specified using
the Design/Rating > Superstructure > Preferences command. Currently, the
AASHTO STD 2002, AASHTO LRFD 2007, AASHTO LRFD 2012,
CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992, and Indian IRC codes are available for the design of a
concrete box girder; the AASHTO 2007 LRFD, AASHTO LRFD 2012,
CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992, and Indian IRC codes are available for the design of a
Precast I or U Beam with Composite Slab; the AASHTO LFRD 2007, AASH-
TO LRFD 2012, CAN/CSA S6, and EN 1992-1-1 are available for Steel I-
Beam with Composite Slab superstructures; and the AASHTO LRFD 2012 is
available for a U tub bridge with a composite slab.

Name and Bridge Object 4-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 4-1 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a concrete box girder bridge, and the check type is concrete box stress. Figure
4-2 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for a
Composite I or U girder bridge and the check type is precast composite stress.
Figure 4-3 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a Steel I-Beam bridge and the check type is composite strength.

Figure 4-1 Bridge Design


Request - Concrete Box
Girder Bridges

4-2 Name and Bridge Object


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Figure 4-2 Bridge Design


Request - Composite I or
U Girder Bridges

Figure 4-3 Bridge Design


Request – Steel I Beam
with Composite Slab

Name and Bridge Object 4-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

4.1 Name and Bridge Object


Each Bridge Design Request must have unique name. Any name can be used.

If multiple Bridge Objects are used to define a bridge model, select the bridge
object to be designed for the Design Request. If a bridge model contains only a
single bridge object, the name of that bridge object will be the only item avail-
able from the Bridge Object drop-down list.

4.2 Check Type


The Check Type refers to the type of design to be performed and the available
options depend on the type of bridge deck being modeled.

For a Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following check
type options:

AASHTO STD 2002

 Concrete Box Stress

AASHTO LRFD 2007

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear and Torsion

 Concrete Box Principal

CAN/CSA S6, and EN 1992-1-1 and IRC: 112

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear

For Multi-Cell Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following
check type options:

4-4 Name and Bridge Object


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

AASHTO LRFD 2007, CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992-1-1, and IRC: 112

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear

For bridge models with precast I or U Beams with Composite Slabs,


CSiBridge provides three check type options, as follows:

AASHTO LRFD 2007, CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992-1-1, and IRC: 112

 Precast Comp Stress

 Precast Comp Shear

 Precast Comp Flexure

For bridge models with steel I-beam with composite slab superstructures,
CSiBridge provides the following check type option:

AASHTO LRFD 2007 and 2012

 Steel Comp Strength

 Steel Comp Service

 Steel Comp Fatigue

 Steel Comp Constructability Staged

 Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged

EN 1994-2:2005

 Steel Comp Ultimate

 Steel Comp Service Stresses

 Steel Comp Service Rebar

 Steel Comp Constructability Staged

Check Type 4-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged

The bold type denotes the name that appears in the check type drop-down list.
A detailed description of the design algorithm can be found in Chapter 5 for
concrete box girder bridges, in Chapter 6 for multi-cell box girder bridges, in
Chapter 7 for precast I or U beam with composite slabs, and in Chapter 8 for
steel I-beam with composite slab.

4.3 Station Range


The station range refers to the particular zone or portion of the bridge that is to
be designed. The user may choose the entire length of the bridge, or specify
specific zones using station ranges. Multiple zones (i.e., station ranges) may be
specified as part of a single design request.

When defining a station range, the user specifies the Location Type, which de-
termines if the superstructure forces are to be considered before or at a station
point. The user may choose the location type as before the point, after the
point, or both.

4.4 Design Parameters


Design parameters are overwrites that can be used to change the default values
set automatically by the program. The parameters are specific to each code,
deck type, and check type. Figure 4-4 shows the Superstructure Design Re-
quest Parameters form.

4-6 Station Range


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Figure 4-3 Superstructure Design Request Parameters form

Table 4-1 shows the parameters for concrete box girder bridges. Table 4-2
shows the parameters for multi-cell concrete box bridges. Table 4-3 shows the
parameters applicable when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast
I or U girders with composite slabs. Table 4-4 shows the parameters applicable
when the superstructure has a deck that includes steel I-beams.

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


AASHTO STD 2002
 Resistance Factor - multiplies both compression and tension
Concrete Box Stress
stress limits
 Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multiplier on sqrt( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit,
given in the units specified
 The tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or
ksi units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit

Design Parameters 4-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


AASHTO LRFD 2007
Concrete Box Stress  Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f ′c
and the resulting tension limit

Concrete Box Shear  Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor
that multiplies nominal shear resistance to obtain factored
resistance for light-weight concrete
 Include Resal (Hunching-girder) shear effects – Yes or No.
Specifies whether the component of inclined flexural com-
pression or tension, in the direction of the applied shear, in
variable depth members shall or shall not be considered
when determining the design factored shear force in accord-
ance with Article 5.8.6.2.
 Concrete Box Shear Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material label that will be used to determine the area
of shear rebar required
 Longitudinal Torsional Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material that will be used to determine the area of lon-
gitudinal torsional rebar required
Concrete Box  Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Flexure plies both compression and tension stress limits

Concrete Box  See the Box Stress design parameter specifications


Principal

CAN/CSA S6
Concrete Box Stress  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit
Concrete Box Shear  Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA

4-8 Design Parameters


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor – Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Tab slab rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of the
top slab to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse
torsion reinforcement
 Web rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of the web
to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse torsion re-
inforcement
 Bottom Slab rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of
the bottoms lab to the centerline of the exterior closed trans-
verse torsion reinforcement
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of
transverse rebar in the girder
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Concrete Box  Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Flexure Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi Pt ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Eurocode EN 1992
Concrete Box Stress  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
pression stress limit
 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Concrete Box Shear  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.

Design Parameters 4-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Duct Diameter – Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear re-
sistance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor
 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudi-
nal rebar in the girder.
Concrete Box  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

4 - 10 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


AASHTO LRFD 2007
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Stress that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units -
Multiplier on sqrt ( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit,
given in the units specified
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Shear that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Re-
sistance Factor that multiplies nominal shear resistance to
obtain factored resistance for light-weight concrete
 Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement – in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10-3, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10-3
 Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = 6.0x10-3, Typical value(s): 6.0x10-3
 PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 0.75 to 1.0
 Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 0.9, Typical value(s): 0.9 to 1.0
 Specifies which method for shear design will be used – ei-
ther Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accord-
ance with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with
5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT option is available.
 A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder.

 A previously defined rebar material that will be used to de-


termine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Flexure that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits

CAN/CSA S6

Design Parameters 4 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Box Stress Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Box Shear accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Box Flexure accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Eurocode EN 1992
Multi-Cell Concrete  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
Box Stress pression stress limit

4 - 12 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
Box Shear
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.
The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Duct Diameter – Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear re-
sistance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor
 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudi-
nal rebar in the girder.

Design Parameters 4 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


Multi-Cell Concrete  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Box Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


AASHTO
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Stress plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on f′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt(f′c) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f′c
and the resulting tension limit
Precast Comp  PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multiplies both compression
Shear and tension stress limits
 PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor that multiplies nominal
shear resistance to obtain factored resistance for light-weight
concrete
 Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement – in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10-3, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10-3

4 - 14 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Val-
ue = 6.0x10-3, Typical value(s): 6.0x10-3
 PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 0.75 to 1.0
 Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 0.9, Typical value(s): 0.9 to 1.0
 Specifies what method for shear design will be used - either
Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accordance
with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with 5.8.3.4.3
Currently only the MCFT option is available.
 A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder
 A previously defined rebar material that will be used to deter-
mine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Flexure plies both compression and tension stress limits
CAN/CSA S6
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
Stress on f′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f′c
and the resulting tension limit
Precast Comp  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Shear accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit (see
Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder.

Design Parameters 4 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar ma-
terial that will be used to determine the required area of longi-
tudinal rebar n the girder
Precast Comp  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Flexure accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
Eurocode EN 1992
Precast Comp  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
Stress pression stress limit
 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension stress
limit
Precast Comp  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
Shear
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force. The
value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the transmis-
sion length of the post tensioning used in shear resistance
equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post tension-
ing.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor

4 - 16 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal
rebar in the girder.
Precast Comp  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.

 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-


tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons af-
ter losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam


AASHTO LRFD 2007
Steel I-Beam -  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Strength
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?
 Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
posite section?
 Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio
 Use AASHTO, Appendix A to determine resistance in nega-
tive moment regions?
Steel I Beam Comp -  Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
Service posite section?
 Shored Construction?
 Does concrete slab resist tension?
 Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio

Design Parameters 4 - 17
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam


Steel-I Comp -  There are no user defined design request parameters for
Fatigue fatigue
Steel I Comp  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Construct Stgd
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?

 Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0
 The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units
Steel I Comp  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Construct Non Stgd
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?
 Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0
 The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units

4.5 Demand Sets


A demand set name is required for each load combination that is to be consid-
ered in a design request. The load combinations may be selected from a list of
user defined or default load combinations that are program determined (see
Chapter 2).

4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors


When the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders with
composite slabs or multi-cell boxes, Live Load Distribution Factors can be
specified. LLD factors are described in Chapter 3.

4 - 18 Demand Sets
Chapter 5
Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

This chapter describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASHTO
STD-2002, and LRFD-2007 code, for design and stress check of the super-
structure of a concrete box type bridge deck section.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authorities,
and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into CSiBridge, the
program gives the user an option to select what type of interims shall be used
for the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on the Code Prefer-
ences button.

In CSiBridge, when distributing loads for concrete box design, the section is
always treated as one beam; all load demands (permanent and transient) are
distributed evenly to the webs for stress and flexure and proportionally to the
slope of the web for shear. Torsion effects are always considered and assigned
to the outer webs and the top and bottom slabs.

With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO Article
5.8.6, torsion is considered.

This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASHTO
STD-2002, LRFD-2007 code for design and stress check of the superstructure
of a concrete box type bridge deck section.

5-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

5.1 Stress Design AASHTO STD-2002

5.1.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The com-
pression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typ-


ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ′c is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain the tension limit.

5.1.2 Demand Parameters


FactorCompLim – percentage of the basic unit stress for compression service
design; Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand compres-
sive stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the control-
ling stress can be selected and compared against one compression limit.

FactorTensLim – percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service design;
Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand tensile stresses are
divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the controlling stress can be
selected and compared against one tension limit.

5.1.3 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber and three points at the
bottom fiber: the extreme left, Bridge Layout Line, and extreme right. The
stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both
bending moments (M2 and M3).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). If the demand set
contains live load, the program positions the load to capture extreme stress at
each of the evaluation points.

5-2 Stress Design AASHTO STD-2002


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

The stresses are divided by the appropriate demand parameter. Then extremes
are found for each point, and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters (see Sec-
tion 5.2.1).

5.2 Stress Design AASHTO LRFD-2007

5.2.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Values = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);


Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ′c is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain the tension limit.

5.2.2 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber and three points at the
bottom fiber: extreme left, Bridge Layout Line, and extreme right. The stresses
assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both bending
moments (M2 and M3).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). If the demand set
contains live load, the program positions the load to capture extreme stress at
each of the evaluation points.

Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is rec-
orded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters (see Sec-
tion 5.2.1).

Stress Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

5.2.3 Stress Design Example


Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48 as shown in Figure 5-1

Figure 5-1 LRFD 2007 Stress Design, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Concrete unit weight, wc = 0.150 kcf


Concrete strength at 28 days, f ′c = 5.0 ksi
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: ½ in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
Ultimate strength fpu = 270.0 ksi
Yield strength fpy = 0.9 ksi
fpu = 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, Ep = 28500 ksi

5-4 Stress Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Figure 5-2 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Stress Design


AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Reinforcing bars:
yield strength, fy = 60.0 ksi

Section Properties
A = area of cross-section of beam = 826 in2
h = overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I = moment of inertia about centroid of the beam = 170812 in4
yb,yt = distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in

Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:


P = −856.51 kip
M3 = −897.599 kip-in

Top fiber stress =


P M −856.51 −897.599
σtop = − 3 ytop = − 19.5 =−0.9344 ksi
A I 826 170812

Stress Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Bottom fiber stress =


P M −856.51 −897.599
σbot = + 3 ybot = + 19.5 = −1.139 ksi
A I 826 170812
Stresses reported by CSiBridge:
top fiber stress envelope = −0.9345 ksi
bottom fiber stress envelope = −1.13945 ksi

5.3 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007

5.3.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The nominal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain
factored resistance.

5.3.2 Variables
APS Area of PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

Aslab Area of the slab

bslab Effective flange width = horizontal width of the slab, measured from
out to out

bwebeq Equivalent thickness of all webs in the section

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the pre-
stressing tendons

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of rebar in


the tension zone

fps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

fpu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average


of all tendons in the tensile zone)

5-6 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

fpy Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of all
tendons in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

tslabeq Equivalent thickness of the slab

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LFRD Section 5.7.2.2.

φ Resistance factor for flexure

5.3.3 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the approx-
imate stress distribution specified in AASHTO LFRD Article 5.7.2.2. The nat-
ural relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by
an equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85 f ′c over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located par-
allel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor
β1 is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete
strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi, β1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that β1 is not to be taken to be less than
0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LFRD Par-


agraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal axis 3
only. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone
as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located
in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined ten-
dons in a section, stressed or not, have fpe (effective stress after loses) larger
than 0.5 fpu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be consid-
ered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation have been applied. This is consistent with the demands being
reported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the
flange (slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

5.3.4 Algorithm
At each section:

 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.

Aslab
tslabeq =
bslab

 The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hori-
zontal thicknesses.
nweb
bwebeq = ∑b
1
web

 The β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LFRD


5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

 f ′ − 28 
– If f ′c > 28 MPa, =
then β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 =0.85.

 The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded ten-
dons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on which sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to re-
sist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression
stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located

5-8 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress
block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from
the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to
the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of the tendon areas, APS

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestress-


ing tendons, dP

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, fpu

– constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:

– sum of the tension rebar areas, As

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, ds

 The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated
in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).

APS fPU + As fs
c=
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

 The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if


the section is a T-section or rectangular section.

– If cβ1 > tslabeq , the section is a T-section.

 If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

APS fPU + As fs − 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LFRD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).

– If the section is a T-section,

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS fPS  d p − 1  + AS f y  ds − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 
else
 cβ   cβ 
=
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f y  d s − 1  .
 2   2 

 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr = φMn
 Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and
the controlling demand set name is recorded.

5.3.5 Flexure Design Example


Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48, as shown in Figure 5-3.

Concrete unit weight, wc = 0.150 kcf


Concrete strength at 28 days, f ′c = 5.0 ksi (~34.473 MPa)
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: ½ in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
Ultimate strength fpu = 270.0 ksi

5 - 10 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Yield strength fpy = 0.9 ksi


fpu = 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, Ep = 28 500 ksi
Reinforcing bar yield strength, fy = 60.0 ksi

Figure 5-3 LRFD 2007 Flexure Design


Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 11


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 5-4 Reinforcement, LRFD 2007 Flexure Design


Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Section Properties
A = area of cross-section of beam = 826 in2
h = overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I = moment of inertia about centroid of the beam = 170812 in4
yb, yt = distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in
Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:
P = −856.51 kip
M3 = −897.599 kip-in
 The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.

Aslab 48 × 5.5
=
tslabeq = = 5.5in
bslab 48
Value reported by CSiBridge = 5.5 in

 The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hori-
zontal thicknesses.

5 - 12 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

nweb
bwebeq = ∑b
1
web = 5 + 5 = 10 in

Value reported by CSiBridge = 10.0 in

Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive mo-
ment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block and
is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the
bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends
over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line lo-
cated parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme
compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral
axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– = 0.153 ( 6 + 23
sum of the tendon areas, APTbottom = ) 4.437 in 2

Value reported by CSiBridge = 4.437 in2

– distance from the center of gravity of the tendons to the extreme com-
23 × 2 + 6 × 4
pression fiber, yPTbottom =
39 − =
36.586 in
23 + 6

Value reported by CSiBridge = 19.5 + 17.0862 = 36.586 in

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, f pu = 270 kip

Value reported by CSiBridge = 270 kip

– constant k (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py   243 
k= 2  1.04 − = 2  1.04 − = 0.28
 f pu   270 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.28

 The β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LFRD


5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c .

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

– If f ′c > 28 MPa, then

 f ′ − 28 
=β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05;0.65 
 7 
 34.473 − 28 
= max  0.85 − 0.05;0.65  =
0.80376
 7 
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 0.8037 (not reported)

 The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated
in accordance with (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).

APT f pu
c=
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPT
y pt
4.437 × 270
= 6.91in
0.85 × 5 × 0.8037 × 48 + 0.28 × 4.437 36.586
270

Value calculated by CSiBridge = 6.919 in (not reported)

 The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if


the section is a T-section or a rectangular section.

– If cβ1 > tslabeq → 6.91 × 0.80376


= 5.56 in > 5.5in , the section is a
T-section.
Value reported by CSiBridge, section = T-section

– If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance


with (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APT f pu − 0.85 f ′c (bslab − bwebeq )tslabeq


=c =
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bwebeq + kAPT
y pt
4.437 × 270 − 0.85 × 5(48 − 10)5.5
= 7.149 in
0.85 × 5 × 0.8037 × 10 + 0.28 × 4.437 36.586
270

Value reported by CSiBridge = 7.1487 in

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

5 - 14 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

 c   7.149 
f ps = f pu  1 − k  =270  1 − 0.28  =255.23 ksi
 y pt   36.586 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 255.228 ksi

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LFRD 5.7.3.2.2-1).

– If the section is a T-section, then

 cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APT f ps  yPT − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= 
 2   2 2 
 7.149 × 0.80376 
= 4.437 × 255.228 ×  36.586 − +
 2 
 7.149 × 0.80376 5.5 
0.85 × 5 ( 48 − 10 ) 5.5  − 
 2 2 
= 38287.42 kip-in
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 38287.721 kip-in (not reported)

Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr = φM n = 1.0 × 38287.42 =38287.42 kip-in


Value reported by CSiBridge = 38287.721 kip-in

5.4 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007

5.4.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical value: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Val-


ue = 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight
concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance.

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 15


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Include Resal (haunched girder) Shear Effect – Typical value: Yes. Specifies
whether the component of inclined flexural compression or tension, in the di-
rection of the applied shear, in variable depth members shall or shall not be
considered when determining the design factored shear force.

Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning - Specifies approach to proportioning of


transverse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are two
options: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning per
Figure C5.8.3.2-2.

5.4.2 Variables
A Gross area of the section

AO Area enclosed by the shear flow path, including the area of holes, if any

Al Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement

Avsweb Area of shear reinforcement in web per unit length

Avtweb Area of transverse torsion reinforcement in web per unit length

b Minimum horizontal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts)

bv Minimum effective horizontal width of the web adjusted for the pres-
ence of ducts

be Minimum effective normal width of the shear flow path adjusted to ac-
count for the presence of ducts

dv Effective vertical height of the section = max(0.8×h, distance from the


extreme compression fiber to the center of gravity of the tensile PT)

CGtop, CGbot Distance from the center of gravity of the section to the top and
bottom fiber

h Vertical height of the section

ph Perimeter of the polygon defined by the centroids of the longitudinal


chords of the space truss resisting torsion

5 - 16 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Pu ,Vu 2 , M u 3 , Tu Factored demand forces and moments per section

t Minimum normal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts) =
b cos ( α web )

tv Minimum effective normal width of the web = bv cos (α web )

αweb Web angle of inclination from the vertical

φ Resistance factor for shear

κweb Distribution factor for the web

λ Normal or light-weight concrete factor

5.4.3 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LFRD Para-
graph 5.8.6 (Shear and Torsion for Segmental Box Girder Bridges). The proce-
dure is not applicable to discontinuity regions and applies only to sections
where it is reasonable to assume that plane sections remain plane after loading.
The user should select for design only those sections that comply with the pre-
ceding assumptions by defining appropriate station ranges in the Bridge Design
Request (see Chapter 4).

If the option to consider resal effects is activated, the component of the inclined
flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand shear in variable
depth members is considered when determining the design section shear force
(AASHTO LFRD Paragraph 5.8.6.1).

The section design shear force is distributed into individual webs assuming that
the vertical shear that is carried by a web decreases with increased inclination
of the web from vertical. Section torsion moments are assigned to external
webs and slabs.

The rebar area and ratio are calculated using measurements normal to the web.
Thus, vertical shear forces are divided by cos(alpha_web). The rebar area cal-
culated is the actual, normal cross-section of the bars. The rebar ratio is calcu-
lated using the normal width of the web, tweb = bweb × cos(alpha_web).

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The effects of ducts in members are considered in accordance with paragraph


5.8.6.1 of the code. In determining the web or flange effective thickness, be,
one-half of the diameter of the ducts is subtracted. All defined tendons in a sec-
tion, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted. Each tendon at a section is
checked for presence in the web or flange, and the minimum controlling effec-
tive web and flange thicknesses are evaluated.

The tendon duct is considered as having effect on the web or flange effective
thickness even if only part of the duct is within the element boundaries. In such
cases, the entire one-half of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the el-
ement thickness.

If several tendon ducts overlap in one flange or web (when projected on the
horizontal axis for flange, or when projected on vertical axis for the web), the
diameters of ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the effective thick-
ness. In the web, the effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bottom
of each duct; in the flange, the effective thickness is evaluated at the left and
right sides of the duct.

Transverse reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify if


minimum shear reinforcement is provided. It is also used to calculate Vs shear
resistance component. The density (area per unit length) of provided transverse
reinforcement in a given girder is based on values specified in the Bridge Ob-
ject within distance 0.5*dv measured downstation and upstation from a given
section cut. The method for calculating the rebar density is controlled by De-
sign Parameter named “Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning” described in sec-
tion 5.4.1 of this manual. If provided transverse reinforcement is insufficient to
cover demands or does not satisfy code minimum reinforcement per clause
5.8.2.5-2, area of extra required transverse rebar per unit length is calculated
and reported.

Longitudinal reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify re-


quirements of clause 5.8.6.4-3 for longitudinal reinforcement for torsion. When
longitudinal reinforcement is insufficient to cover demands, then the area of
required extra longitudinal rebar is calculated and reported.

The Shear and Torsion Design is completed first on a per web basis. Rebar
needed for individual webs is then summed and reported for the entire section.
The D/C ratio is calculated for each web. Then the shear area of all webs is
summed and the entire section D/C is calculated. Therefore, the controlling

5 - 18 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

section D/C does not necessarily match the controlling web D/C (in
other words, other webs can make up the capacity for a “weak” web).

5.4.4 Algorithm
 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 If the option to consider real effects is activated, the component of the in-
clined flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand shear in
variable depth members is evaluated as follows:

– Inclination angles of the top and bottom slabs are determined

 yslab top2 − yslab top1 


αslab top =
arctan  
 Stat2 − Stat1 
 yslab bot2 − yslab bot1 
αslab bot =
arctan  
 Stat2 − Stat1 

where

yslab top2 , yslab top1  vertical coordinate of the center of gravity of the top
slab at stations 1 and 2. The y origin is assumed to be at the top
of the section and the + direction is up.

Stat1 , Stat2  stations of adjacent sections. When the section being


analyzed is “Before,” the current section station is Stat2; when
the section being analyzed is “After,” the current section station
is Stat1. Therefore, the statement Stat1 < Stat2 is always valid.

 The magnitudes of normal forces in slabs are determined as follows:

P M 
=
Pslab top Aslab top  u − u 3 dslab top 
 A I 3 

P M 
=
Pslab bot Aslab bot  u + u 3 dslab bot 
 A I 3 

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

where dslab top , dslab bot are distances from the center of gravity of the
section to the center of gravity of the slab (positive).

 The magnitudes of vertical components of slab normal forces are determined


as follows:

Presal top = Pslab top tan α slab top

Presal bot = Pslab bot tan α slab bot

 On the basis of the location and inclination of each web, the per-web demand
values are evaluated.

Outer Web Inner Web


Location Vuweb Tuweb Vuweb Tuweb
Shear and abs(Vu 2 + Presal top + Presal bot ) × κ abs(Vu 2 + Presal top + Presal bot ) × κ
Torsion Abs(Tu) 0
cosα web cosα web
Check

cos ( | α web |)
where κ web =
∑ cos ( | α web |)
nweb
1

 Evaluate effective thicknesses:


Evaluate dv bv be tv

– If bv ≤ 0, then

D
= 2,= 0; Avs=
WebPassFlag web 0; Avt=
web 0; Avs=
flag 2; Avt=
flag 2
C
proceed to report web results

– If be < 0, then SectionPassFlag = 2.

 Evaluate design f ′c :

f ′c min( f ′c , 8.3 MPa)

 Evaluate the stress variable K:

– Calculate the extreme fiber stress:

5 - 20 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

CGtop σ tens= max ( σ top , σ bot )


P M3 P M3
σbot = + CGbot σ top = −
A I 33 A I 33

|P|
– If σ tens > 0.5 f ′c , then K = 1; else K
= 1+ A ,
0.166 × f ′c

where K < 2.

 Evaluate Vc per web (shear capacity of concrete):

Vcweb 0.1663K λ f ′c bv dv .
= (AASHTO LFRD 5.8.6.5-3)

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the trans-


verse reinforcement eq. 5.8.6.5-4

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠 = 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 (5.8.3.3-4)

 Evaluate total factored shear resistance and check against a maximum speci-
fied in 5.8.6.5-2

Vr= 𝜙𝜙v min(Vc+Vs ; �𝑓𝑓′𝑐𝑐 bv dv)

 Calculate shear DoverC ratio based on the provided shear rebar density
|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 |
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟

 For external webs calculate portion of density of vertical shear rebar that is
utilized for shear

|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 | − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �0, �
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑉𝑉

 If shear DoverCshear < 1 then calculate extra required shear vertical rebar
|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 | − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 − 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠
𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 =
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉
𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 =
𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Evaluate minimum transverse reinforcement density required per code


𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣
If |𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 | > 0.5 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 then 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 0.35 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦
in accordance with

(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else AVS min = 0.

 Evaluate the ratio of demand and maximum concrete shear capacity based on
equation 5.8.6.5.-2 for the web:
|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 |
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣

 Evaluate Tcr (AASHTO LFRD eq. 5.8.6.3-2):

Tcr = 0.166 K f ′c 2 A0 be .

 Evaluate torsion rebar:

1
– If Tuweb < φTcr , then:
3

Avtflag = 0

Avtweb = 0

Al = 0

Torsion Effects Flag = 0;

else:

for external webs calculate D/C based on provided vertical rebar that is
not utilized for shear

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 = 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 − 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒

|𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 |
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 =
2 × 𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 × 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 × 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣

If 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑜𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ≤ 0 then DoverCtorsvert is reported as equal to 10000000.

5 - 22 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

If 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 > 1 then the required extra vertical rebar to cover


shear and torsion at external webs is recalculated as:
|𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 |
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 = 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 + − 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
2 × 𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 × 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

 Evaluate the combined shear and torsion ratio of demand and maximum con-
crete shear capacity based on equation 5.8.6.5.-5 for the external web:
|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 | |𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 |
+
𝑏𝑏𝑉𝑉 × 𝑑𝑑𝑉𝑉 2 × 𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 × 𝑏𝑏𝑒𝑒
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 =
1.25 × �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′

 Evaluate and report controlling DoverC ratio for each web

DoverC=max(ConcRatioshear, ConcRatiotorsionr, DoverCsheart, DoverCtorsvert)

 Evaluate the ratio of demand and maximum concrete shear capacity based on
equation 5.8.6.5.-2 for the entire section:
|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 |
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ ∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
1 𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣

and evaluate the combined shear and torsion ratio of demand and maxi-
mum concrete shear capacity based on equation 5.8.6.5.-5 for the entire
section

|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 | |𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢 |
+
∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
1 𝑏𝑏 × 𝑑𝑑𝑉𝑉
2 × 𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 × 𝑏𝑏𝑒𝑒
𝑣𝑣
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 =
1.25 × �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′

 Evaluate D/C for shear demand for the entire section


|𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 |
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
∑1 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Evaluate the longitudinal rebar required for torsion per eq. 5.8.6.4-3 and
compare against provided longitudinal rebar in the entire section. If needed
calculate extra required longitudinal rebar.
𝑇𝑇
�𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 � × 𝑝𝑝ℎ
𝑉𝑉
𝐴𝐴𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = − 𝐴𝐴𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
2 × 𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 × 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

 Calculate torsion D/C of the section as a maximum of two ratios – ratio of


required vertical shear rebar vs. available and ratio of required longitudinal
rebar vs. provided:
|𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢 | |𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢 |×𝑝𝑝ℎ
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = �2×𝜙𝜙 , 2×𝜙𝜙 �
𝑉𝑉 ×𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 ×𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 ×𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉 ×𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 ×𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 ×𝐴𝐴𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙

If 𝐴𝐴𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 ≤ 0 then DoverCtorslong is reported as equal to 10000000.


 Evaluate controlling D/C for section:

DoverC=max(ConcRatioshear, ConcRatiotorsionr, DoverCsheart, DoverCtors)

5.5 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD-2007

5.5.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0.
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Values = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);


Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ′c is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.

5 - 24 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

5.5.2 Demand Parameters


FactorCompLim – Percentage of the basic unit stress for compression service
design; Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand compres-
sive stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the control-
ling stress can be selected and compared against one compression limit.

FactorTensLim – Percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service design;
Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand tensile stresses are
divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the controlling stress can be
selected and compared against one tension limit.

5.5.3 Algorithm
The principal stresses are evaluated at three points at each web: the web cen-
terline at the bottom of the top slab; web centerline at the top of the bottom
slab; and web centerline at the section neutral axis.

The principal stresses are evaluated for each demand set using the Mohr circle
to combine bending, shear, and torsion stresses. The bending stresses assume
linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both bending moments
(M2 and M3). The shear flow is calculated internally by the program taking in-
to account section properties at the elevation of the stress point. A shear scale
factor is used to convert the total shear flow acting at an elevation (y-
coordinate) to tangential shear stress in the web. The scale factor is equal to the
web shear-distribution factor divided by the cosine of the angle of inclination
of the web from vertical and divided again by the design width of the web.

κ web
Shear Scale Factor =
bweb cos α web

cos(| α |)
where κ web = nweb web , and bweb is the horizontal width of the web.

1
cos(| α web |)

 A torsion scale factor is used to convert the total torque acting on the section
to tangential shear stress in the web. For interior webs, this is equal to zero.
For exterior webs, this is equal to one divided by the plastic torsional modu-
lus.

Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD-2007 5 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

1
Torsion Scale Factor =
Wt

where Wt = 2 A0 t min

A0 = area enclosed by the shear flow path, including area of holes, if any

tmin = minimum normal width of the shear flow path.

 If the demand set contains live load, the program positions the load to cap-
ture extreme stress at each of the evaluation points.

 The stresses are divided by the appropriate demand parameter. Then the ex-
tremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is rec-
orded.

 The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters (see Sec-
tion 5.5.1).

5 - 26 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD-2007


Chapter 6
Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design checks
when the superstructure has a deck that includes cast-in-place multi-cell con-
crete box design and uses the Approximate Method of Analysis, as described in
the AASHTO LRFD-2007 Section 4.6.2.2.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authorities,
and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into CSiBridge, the
program gives the user an option to select what type of interims shall be used
for the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on the Code Prefer-
ences button.

For MulticellConcBox design in CSiBridge, each web and its tributary slabs
are designed separately. Moments and shears due to live load are distributed to
individual webs in accordance with the factors specified in AASHTO LRFD
Articles 4.6.2.2.2 and 4.6.2.2.3 of the code. To control if the section is designed
as “a whole-width structure” in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Article
4.6.2.2.1 of the code, select “Yes” for the “Diaphragms Present” option. When
CSiBridge calculates the Live Load Distribution (LLD) factors, the section and
span qualification criteria stated in AASHTO 4.6.2.2 are verified and non-
compliant sections are not designed.

Stress Design 6-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Article 5.8.3.4.2 of the code, torsion is ignored.

6.1 Stress Design


The following parameters are considered during stress design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The com-
pression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.

FactorTensLim – f 'c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typi-


cal values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f 'c is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain tension limit.

The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the top slab and
three points at the bottom fiber of the bottom slab: the left corner, the centerline
web and the right corner of the relevant slab tributary area. The location is la-
beled in the output plots and tables. See Chapter 9, Section 9.1.

Concrete strength f ′c is read at every point, and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim - f ′c multiplier and FactorTensLim -
f 'c multiplier.

The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and ei-
ther both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on
which method for determining LLD factors has been specified in the Design
Request (see Chapters 3 and 4).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). Extremes are found
for each point and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding parameters.

6-2 Stress Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

6.2 Shear Design


The following parameters are considered during shear design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Val-


ue = 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight
concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance.

Check Sub Type – Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: either Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in ac-
cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT
option is available.

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10−3,
Typical value(s): 0 to −0.4x10−3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10−3, Typi-
cal value: 6.0x10−3.

PhiC for Nu – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for Mu – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

sx – Maximumum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control rein-


forcement per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5. This parameter is used only when
min transverse reinforcement is not provided; Default Value = 7.9in.

ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only when


min transverse reinforcement is not provided; Default Value = 1.2in.

Shear Design 6-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning - Specifies approach to proportioning of


transverse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are two
options: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning per
Figure C5.8.3.2-2.

Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specifies option how to determine sign
of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4). There are
four options: 1. Automatic by CSiBridge; 2. Sign of MuMin equal to sign of Mu;
3. Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and 4. do not generate MuMin,
use Mu.

6.2.1 Variables
Ac Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member

Aps Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member

Avl Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the mem-
ber at the section under consideration

AVS Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length

AVS min Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.2.5

a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


Section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.

b Minimum web width

bv Effective web width adjusted for presence of prestressing ducts in


accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.2.9

dgirder Depth of the girder

dPTbot Distance from the top of the top slab to the center of gravity of the
tendons in the bottom of the precast beam

dv Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.2.9

6-4 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

Ec Young’s modulus of concrete

Ep Prestressing steel Young’s modulus

Es Reinforcement Young’s modulus

f pu Specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel

Mu Factored moment at the section

Nu Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile

Vp Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-


stressing force; if Vp has the same sign as Vu, the component is resist-
ing the applied shear.

Vu Factored shear demand per girder excluding force in tendons

V2 c Shear in the Section Cut excluding the force in tendons

V2Tot Shear in the Section Cut including the force in tendons

εs Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement (AASH-


TO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε sLimitPos , ε sLimitNeg = Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal


tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request

ϕV Resistance factor for shear

ϕP Resistance factor for axial load

ϕF Resistance factor for moment

6.2.2 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The pro-
cedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over

Shear Design 6-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

an area bv wide and dv deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle θ and shown as D) remains constant over dv, and that the
shear strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress
conditions at just one location in the web. For design, the user should select on-
ly those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate
station ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

The effective web width is taken as the minimum web width, measured parallel
to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the tensile and compressive forces
as a result of flexure. In determining the effective web width at a particular lev-
el, one-quarter the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the
web width.

All defined tendons in a section, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted.


Each tendon at a section is checked for presence in the web, and the minimum
controlling effective web thicknesses are evaluated.

The tendon duct is considered to have an effect on the web effective thickness
even if only part of the duct is within the web boundaries. In such cases, the en-
tire one-quarter of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the element
thickness.

If several tendon ducts overlap in one web (when projected on the vertical ax-
is), the diameters of the ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the effec-
tive thickness. The effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bottom
of each duct.

Shear design is completed on a per-web basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a


description of the live load distribution to individual girders.

Transverse reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify if


minimum shear reinforcement is provided. It is also used to calculate Vs shear
resistance component. The density (area per unit length) of provided transverse
reinforcement in a given girder is based on values specified in the Bridge Ob-
ject within distance 0.5*dv*cot θ measured downstation and upstation from a
given section cut. The method for calculating the rebar density is controlled by
Design Parameter named “Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning” described in
section 6.2 of this manual. If provided transverse reinforcement is insufficient
to cover demands or does not satisfy code minimum reinforcement per clause

6-6 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

5.8.2.5, area of extra required transverse rebar per unit length is calculated and
reported.

Longitudinal reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify re-


quirements of clause 5.8.3.5 for longitudinal reinforcement on the flexural ten-
sion side. When longitudinal reinforcement is insufficient to cover demands,
then the area of required extra longitudinal rebar on the flexural tension side is
calculated and reported.

6.2.3 Algorithms
All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes, a
new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up from
the maximum tension values of P and the maximum absolute values of V2 and
M3 of the two StepTypes (Max and Min) present in the envelope COMBO
case. The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS and the signs
of the P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the industry practice
where sections are designed for extreme shear and moments that are not neces-
sarily corresponding to the same design vehicle position. The section cut is de-
signed for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min and ABSand the
controlling StepType is reported.

In cases where the demand moment Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , two new force demand
= Vu − Vp dvpos and Muneg
sets are generated where Mupos = Vu − Vp dvneg . The acro-
nyms “-CodeMinMuPos” and “-CodeMinMuNeg” are added to the end of the
StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved.

The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestress-
ing force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2 c − V2Tot
Vp =
ngirders

The depth of the equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative mo-
ment is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.7.3.1.1.

Shear Design 6-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Effective shear depth is evaluated.

=
If Mu > 0, then dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder , 0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a ) .

If Mu < 0, then

=dv max 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × (dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ),(dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) − 0.5 × a  .

The ratio of demand and maximum concrete shear capacity is calculated based
on AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.3-2.
𝑉𝑉
� 𝑢𝑢 −𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 �
𝜙𝜙
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 0.25𝑉𝑉𝑓𝑓′ (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏𝑣𝑣 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣

Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl

Adjust denominator values as follows.

If εsdenominator = 0 and εsnumerator > 0, then εs = εsLimitPos and

ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = .
Es

If εsnumerator <0, then ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac

Evaluate (eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

ε
ε s = snumerator
ε sdenominator

Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face of
the section.

6-8 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s .
Agirder

Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension re-
inforcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate how
much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.

=
ε s max(ε s , ε sLimitNeg ) and ε=
s min(ε s , ε sLimitPos )

Evaluate the angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-


mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)

Evaluate minimum transverse reinforcement density required per code.

If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp ,

0.083 × λ f 'c × b
then AVSmin = in accordance with
fy
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1);
else AVS min = 0.

Check if the provided girder transverse reinforcement density Avprov averaged


over distance 0.5*dv*cot θ measured up-station and down-station form current
section cut satisfies minimum specified by code and evaluate the factor β indi-
cating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit tension and shear,
as specified in Article 5.8.3.4.2

4.8
If Avprov≥Avmin then β =
1 + 750 × ε s

else
4.8 51 ∗ 25.4
𝛽𝛽 =
1 + 750𝜀𝜀𝑠𝑠 39 ∗ 25.4 + 𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
35𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥
where 𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = (5.8.3.4)
𝑎𝑎𝑔𝑔 +16

Shear Design 6-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Evaluate the nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-
crete (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3)

=
Vc 0.083 × β × λ × f 'c × b × d v

Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the transverse


reinforcement eq. 5.8.3.3-4

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠 = 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃 (5.8.3.3-4)

Evaluate total factored shear resistance and check against a maximum specified
in 5.8.3.3-2

Vr= 𝜙𝜙v min(Vc+Vs ; 0.25 f’c bv dv)

Evaluate DoverC ratio based on vertical shear rebar

�𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 �


𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 =
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟

If DoverCvert > 1 then evaluate how much extra vertical shear reinforcement is
required to cover the demand.

�𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟


𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 =
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉

If 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 < 0, then Avsextra=0 else


𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 =
𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃

(5.8.3.3-5)

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 = max(𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 − 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 , 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 )

Evaluate the required longitudinal rebar on the flexure tension side in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1)

|𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 | 𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 1


𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = � + 0.5 + �� − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 0.5 min �𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠 , �� cot 𝜃𝜃 − 𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �
𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝜙𝜙𝑝𝑝 𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠 𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

6 - 10 Shear Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

Evaluate DoverC ratio based on longitudinal shear rebar


𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 =
𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

If DoverClongit > 1 then evaluate how much extra longitudinal shear reinforcement is re-
quired to cover the demand

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = (𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 + 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 )𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃 (5.8.3.3-4)

|𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 | 𝑁𝑁 𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉 1
𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = �𝑑𝑑 + 0.5 𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 + ��𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 0.5 min �𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 , 𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 �� cot 𝜃𝜃 − 𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �
𝑣𝑣 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

Assign the required extra longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based
on the moment sign

If MU < 0, then ASLreqExtraTop = ASLreqExtra, ASLreqExtraBot=0

else

ASLreqExtraBot = ASLreqExtra, ASLreqExtraTop =0

Evaluate and report controlling DoverC ratio

DoverC=max(ConcRatio, DoverCvert, DoverClongit)

6.3 Flexure Design


The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 1.0. The nom-
inal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored
resistance

6.3.1 Variables
APS Area of the PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

Flexure Design 6 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Aslab Tributary area of the slab

a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2

bslab Effective flange width = horizontal width of the slab tributary area,
measured from out to out

bwebeq Thickness of the beam web

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons in the tension zone

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


rebar in the tension zone

f ps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-


age of all tendons in the tensile zone)

f py Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of


all tendons are in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

tslabeq Thickness of the composite slab

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2

φ Resistance factor for flexure

6 - 12 Flexure Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

6.3.2 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on approximate
stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural re-
lationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85 fc′ over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located par-
allel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor
β1 is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete
strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi, β1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that β1 is not to be taken to be less than
0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD par-


agraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated only for bending about horizontal
axis 3. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone
as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located
in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined ten-
dons in a section, stressed or not, have fpe (effective stress after loses) larger
than 0.5 fpu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be consid-
ered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being reported
in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the flange
(slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

6.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:

All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the tributary slab area and
the slab width assuming a rectangular shape.

Flexure Design 6 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Aslab
tslabeq =
bslab

β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.2.2


based on section f ′c .

 f ′ − 28 
If f ′c > 28 MPa,=
then β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 =0.85.

The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded ten-
dons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on the sign of moment
they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to resist a
positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress
block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside
of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block ex-
tends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line
located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme
compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is de-
termined:

sum of the tendon areas, APS

center of gravity of the tendons, dP

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu

constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:

sum of tension rebar areas, As

6 - 14 Flexure Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the tension re-
bar, ds

Positive moment resistance – first it is assumed that the equivalent compres-


sion stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis and
the compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq.
5.7.3.1.1-4)

APS fPU + As fs
c=
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if the


section is a T-section or rectangular section.

If cβ1 > tslabeq , the section is a T-section.

If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APS fPU + As fs − 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).

If the section is a T-section, then

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS fPS  d p − 1  + AS f y  ds − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 

else

Flexure Design 6 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 cβ   cβ 
=
M n APS fPS  d p − 1  + AS f y  ds − 1  .
 2   2 

Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr = ϕM n

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and
the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous.

6 - 16 Flexure Design
Chapter 7
Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design and stress
check when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders
with composite slabs in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code (Sec-
tion 7.1).

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authorities,
and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into CSiBridge, the
program gives the user an option to select what type of interims shall be used
for the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on the Code Prefer-
ences button.

This section describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD-2007 code for design and stress check when the superstructure has a
deck that includes precast I or U girders with composite slabs.

7.1 Stress Design


The following parameters are considered during stress design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The com-
pression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

Stress Design 7-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6.

FactorTensLim – f ' c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typ-


ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f'c is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.

The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the composite slab:
the left corner, the centerline beam and the right corner of the composite slab
tributary area. The locations of stress output points at the slab bottom fiber and
the beam top and bottom fibers depend on the type of precast beam present in
the section cut. The locations are labeled in the output plots and tables.

Concrete strength f ′c is read at every point and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier and FactorTensLim –
f ' c multiplier.

The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and ei-
ther both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on
which method for determining the LLDF has been specified in the Design Re-
quest (see Chapters 3 and 4).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). Extremes are found
for each point and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding Parameters.

7.2 Shear Design


The following parameters are considered during shear design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Val-


ue = 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight

7-2 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-


sistance.

Check Sub Type – Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.3 Currently only the MCFT option is
available.

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10-3,
Typical value(s): 0 to −0.4x10-3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10-3, Typical
value(s): 6.0x10-3.

PhiC for Nu – Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1 of the code; Default
Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for Mu – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

sx – Maximumum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control rein-


forcement per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5. This parameter is used only when
min transverse reinforcement is not provided; Default Value = 7.9in.

ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only when


min transverse reinforcement is not provided; Default Value = 1.2in.

Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning - Specifies approach to proportioning of


transverse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are two
options: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning per
Figure C5.8.3.2-2.

Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specifies option how to determine sign
of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4). There are
four options: 1:Automatic by CSiBridge; 2:Sign of MuMin equal to sign of Mu;
3:Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and 4:do not generate MuMin, use
Mu

Shear Design 7-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

7.2.1 Variables
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.

Ac Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member

Aps Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member

AVS Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length

AVSmin Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in


accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5)

Avl Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the mem-
ber at the section under consideration

b Minimum web width of the beam

dv Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO LRFD section


5.8.2.9

dgirder Depth of the girder

dcompslab Depth of the composite slab (includes concrete haunch t2)

dPTBot Distance from the top of the composite slab to the center of gravity
of the tendons in the bottom of the precast beam

Ec Young’s modulus of concrete

Ep Pestressing steel Young’s modulus

Es Reinforcement Young’s modulus

fpu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel

Mu Factored moment at the section

Nu Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile

V2c Shear in Section Cut, excluding the force in the tendons

V2tot Shear in Section Cut, including the force in the tendons

7-4 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Vp Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-


stressing force; if Vp has the same sign as Vu, the component is resist-
ing the applied shear.

Vu Factored shear demand per girder, excluding the force in the tendons

εs Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement (AASH-


TO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

εsLimitPos, εsLimitNeg = Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal


tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request

φV Resistance factor for shear

φP Resistance factor for axial load

φF Resistance factor for moment

7.2.2 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The pro-
cedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over
an area bv wide and dv deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle θ and shown as D) remains constant over dv, and that the
shear strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress
conditions at just one location in the web. The user should select for design on-
ly those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate
station ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

It is assumed that the precast beams are pre-tensioned, and therefore, no ducts
are present in webs. The effective web width is taken as the minimum web
width, measured parallel to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the ten-
sile and compressive forces as a result of flexure.

Shear design is completed on a per-girder basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a


description of the live load distribution to individual girders.

Transverse reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify if


minimum shear reinforcement is provided. It is also used to calculate Vs shear
resistance component. The density (area per unit length) of provided transverse

Shear Design 7-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

reinforcement in a given girder is based on values specified in the Bridge Ob-


ject within distance 0.5*dv*cot θ measured downstation and upstation from a
given section cut. The method for calculating the rebar density is controlled by
Design Parameter named “Type of Shear Rebar Proportioning” described in
Section 7.2 of this manual. If provided transverse reinforcement is insufficient
to cover demands or does not satisfy code minimum reinforcement per clause
5.8.2.5, area of extra required transverse rebar per unit length is calculated and
reported.

Longitudinal reinforcement specified in the Bridge Object is used to verify re-


quirements of clause 5.8.3.5 for longitudinal reinforcement on the flexural ten-
sion side. When longitudinal reinforcement is insufficient to cover demands,
then the area of required extra longitudinal rebar on the flexural tension side is
calculated and reported.

7.2.3 Algorithms
 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes,
two new force demand sets are generated. The new force demand sets are
built up from the maximum tension values of P and the maximum and mini-
mum values of V2 and minimum values of M3 of the two StepTypes (Max
and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case. The StepType of these new
force demand sets are named MaxM3MinV2 and MinM3MaxV2, respective-
ly. The signs of all force components are preserved. The two new cases are
added to comply with industry practice where sections are designed for ex-
treme shear and moments that are not necessarily corresponding to the same
design vehicle position. The section cut is designed for all four StepTypes in
the COMBOMax, Min, MaxM3MinV2, and MinM3MaxV2and the con-
trolling StepType is reported.

 In cases where the demand moment Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , two new force demand
= Vu − Vp dvpos and Muneg =
sets are generated where Mupos − Vu − Vp dvnneg . The
acronyms “-CodeMinMuPos” and “-CodeMinMuNeg” are added to the end
of the StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved. The genera-
tion of the new force demand sets is controlled by Design Parameter named

7-6 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

‘Method for determining sign of MuMin” described in Section 7.2 of this man-
ual.

 The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-
stressing force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2 c − V2tot
Vp =
ngirders

 Depth of equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative moment is
evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).

 Effective shear depth is evaluated.

=
If Mu > 0, then dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a ) .

If Mu < 0, then

=dv max 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × ( dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) , ( dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) − 0.5 × a  .

If Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , then Mu = (Vu − Vp ) × dv .

 The ratio of demand and maximum concrete shear capacity is calculated


based AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.3-2.
𝑉𝑉
�𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 �
𝑉𝑉
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 =
0.25 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣

 Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl

 Adjust denominator values as follows

If ε sdenominator =
0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s =ε sLimitPos and

Shear Design 7-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = .
Es

If ε snumerator < 0, then ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac .

 Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):

ε
ε s = snumerator
ε sdenominator

 Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face
of the section.

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s .
Agirder

 Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension


reinforcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate
how much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.

ε s max ( ε s , ε sLimitNeg ) and =


= ε s min ( ε s , ε sLimitPos )

 Evaluate the angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as de-


termined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)

 Evaluate minimum transverse reinforcement density required per code

0.083 × λ f 'c × b
If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp , then (5.8.2.5.-1) AVSmin =
fy

in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else AVS min = 0.

 Check if the provided girder transverse reinforcement density Avprov aver-


aged over distance 0.5*dv*cot θ measured up-station and down-station
form current section cut satisfies minimum specified by code and evaluate
the factor β indicating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit
tension and shear, as specified in Article 5.8.3.4.2

7-8 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

4.8
If Avprov≥Avmin then β =
1 + 750 × ε s

else
4.8 51 ∗ 25.4
𝛽𝛽 =
1 + 750𝜀𝜀𝑠𝑠 39 ∗ 25.4 + 𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
35𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥
where 𝑠𝑠𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = (5.8.3.4)
𝑎𝑎𝑔𝑔 +16

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-


crete AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3.

=
Vc 0.083 × β × λ × f 'c × b × d v

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the trans-


verse reinforcement eq. 5.8.3.3-4

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠 = 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃 (5.8.3.3-4)

 Evaluate total factored shear resistance and check against a maximum


specified in 5.8.3.3-2

Vr= 𝜙𝜙v min(Vc+Vs ; 0.25 f’c bv dv)

 Evaluate DoverC ratio based on vertical shear rebar

�𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 �


𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 =
𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟

 If DoverCvert > 1 then evaluate how much extra vertical shear reinforce-
ment is required to cover the demand.

�𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 − 𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟


𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 =
𝜙𝜙𝑉𝑉

If 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 < 0, then Avsextra=0 else

Shear Design 7-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 =
𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃

(5.8.3.3-5)

𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 = max(𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 − 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 , 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 )

 Evaluate the required longitudinal rebar on the flexure tension side in ac-
cordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1)

|𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 | 𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢
𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = � + 0.5
𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝜙𝜙𝑝𝑝
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 1
+ �� − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 0.5 min �𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠 , �� cot 𝜃𝜃 − 𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �
𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠 𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

 Evaluate DoverC ratio based on longitudinal shear rebar


𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 =
𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

 If DoverClongit > 1 then evaluate how much extra longitudinal shear rein-
forcement is required to cover the demand

𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = (𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 + 𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 )𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝜃𝜃 (5.8.3.3-4)

|𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢 | 𝑁𝑁𝑢𝑢 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢 𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢


𝐴𝐴𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = �𝑑𝑑 + 0.5 + �� − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � − 0.5 min �𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 , �� cot 𝜃𝜃 −
𝑣𝑣 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝜙𝜙𝑝𝑝 𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠 𝜙𝜙𝑠𝑠

1
𝐸𝐸𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 �
𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

 Assign the required extra longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the
girder based on the moment sign

If MU < 0, then ASLreqCompSlab = ASLreqExtra, ASLreqExtraBot=0

else

ASLreqExtraBot = ASLreqExtra, ASLreqExtraCompSlab =0

Evaluate and report controlling DoverC ratio

DoverC=max(ConcRatio, DoverCvert, DoverClongit)

7 - 10 Shear Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

7.2.4 Shear Design Example


The girder spacing is 9'-8". The girder type is AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72-
inch-deep, 42-inch-wide top flange and 28-inch-wide bottom flange (AASHTO
28/72 Girders). The concrete deck is 8 inches thick, with the haunch thickness
assumed = 0.

Figure 7-1 Shear design example deck section

Materials
Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength, f c′ = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, Ec = 4,415 ksi
Deck slab: 4.0 ksi, Deck slab elastic modulus, Es = 3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel Yield strength, fy = 60 ksi

Shear Design 7 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 7-2 Shear design example beam section

Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade 270


Strand area, Aps = 0.153 in2
Steel yield strength, fpy = 243 ksi
Steel ultimate strength, fpu = 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, Ep = 28,500 ksi

Basic beam section properties


Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, Ag = 1,085 in2
Ac = Area of concrete on the flexural
tension side of the member (bordered

7 - 12 Shear Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

at mid depth of the beam + slab height) = 551 in2


Moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in4
N.A. to top, yt = 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, yb = 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2007 4.6.2.6, the effective flange width of
the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width. For the interior beam, the
bslab = 9'-8" = 116 in.

Demands at interior girder Section 2 = station 10’,


after girder Section 2, Vu = 319.1 kip; Mu = 3678 kip-ft

 The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestress-
ing force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2c − V2tot
Vp = Vp = 0 since no inclined tendons are present.
ngirders

 Depth of equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative moment is
evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).

 Effective shear depth is evaluated:

Since Mu > 0, then (for calculation of the depth of the compression block, re-
fer to the Flexure example in Section 7.3 of this manual)

dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder , 0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a )


=
= max ( 0.72 × 80", 0.9 × 75", 75"− 0.5 × 5.314 × 0.85 )
= =
d v max ( 57.6",67.5",72.74") 72.74"

Value reported by CSiBridge = 72.74"

 Check if Mu < Vu − Vp × dv

M=
u = 44,136 kip-in > ( 319 − 0 ) × 72.74
3,678 × 12 = 23,204 kip-in

 ConcRatio is calculated based on the maximum permissible shear capacity


at a section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2.

Shear Design 7 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝑉𝑉 319
�𝜙𝜙𝑢𝑢 − 𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 � � 0.9 − 0�
𝑉𝑉
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = = = 0.406
0.25 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 0.25 × 6 × 8 × 72.74

Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.406

 Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq.


5.8.3.4.2-4)

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV
3678 × 12
= + 0.5 × 0 + 319 − 0 − 6.73 × 0.7 × 270 =−346.2 kip
72.74

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl = 28500 ksi × 6.73 in 2 = 191805 kip

 Adjust denominator values as follows

If ε sdenominator = 0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s =ε sLimitPos and


ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = is not applicable.
Es

If ε snumerator < 0, then


ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac
= 28500 × 6.73 + 4415 × 551.4= 26 263 461 kip

 Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε −346.2
ε s = snumerator = =−1.318E-4
ε sdenominator 2626346
Value reported by CSiBridge = −1.318E-4

 Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression


face of the section.

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s ; this is not applicable since Nu = 0.
Agirder

7 - 14 Shear Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

 Check against the limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension re-


inforcement as specified in the Design Request, and recalculate Avl.

ε s =max ( ε s , ε sLimitPos ) =max ( −1.318E-4, − 1.318E-4 − 4 ) =−1.318E-4

 Evaluate angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-


mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ θ= 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 θ= 29 + 3500 × −1.318E-4= 28.5deg


Value reported by CSiBridge = 28.5 deg

 Evaluate factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit


tension and shear as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

4.8 4.8
=β = = 5.3265
1 + 750 × ε s 1 + 750 × −1.318E-4
Value reported by CSiBridge = 5.3267

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-


crete (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).

=Vc 0.0316 × β × λ × f 'c × b × dv


= 0.0316 × 5.32 × 1.0 × 6 × 8 × 72.74
= 239.92 kip
Value reported by CSiBridge = 240.00 kip

 Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar:

Vu 319
VS = − Vp − Vc = − 0 − 239.6 = 114.8 kip
φs 0.9

Value reported by CSiBridge = 114.64 kip

If VS < 0, then AVS = 0; else

Vs 114.8
=AVS = = 1.43E-2 in 2 /in
1 1
f y × dv × 60 × 72.74 ×
tan θ tan 28.5
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

 Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.

Shear Design 7 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp − > 319.1 kip > 0.5 × 239.6 =


119.8 kip is true,
0.0316 × λ f 'c × b 0.0316 × 1.0 6 × 8
=AVS min = = 0.01032in 2 /in
fy 60
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1)

If VS < 0 , then AVS = = =


AVSmin ; else AVS max ( AVS min , AVS ) 1.43E-2in 2 /2
Value reported by CSiBridge = 1.43E-2in2/in

 Recalculate Vs in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).

1 1
VS = AVS × f y × dv × = 0.0143 × 60 × 72.74 × = 114.9 kip
tan θ tan 28.5
Value reported by CSiBridge = 114.6 kip

 Evaluate longitudinal rebar on flexure tension side in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1:

 VU  Vu  
 − VP − 0.5 × min  VS ,  
 φS φS 
 − E p × Aps  ×
MU NU 1
A=  d × φ + 0.5 × φ + tan θ
SLreq
 v f P  fy
 319 
 3678 × 12 − 0 − 0.5 × 114.9  1
 0 0.9
= + 0.5 × + − 28500 × 6.73  × =
−3176.3 in 2
 72.74 × 0.9 1.0 tan 28.5  60
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.00 in → no additional longitudinal re-
2

bar is required in the beam bottom flange.

7.3 Flexure Design


The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The nomi-
nal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance

7 - 16 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

7.3.1 Variables
APS Area of PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

Aslab Tributary area of the slab

a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2.

bslab Effective flange width = horizontal width of slab tributary area,


measured from out to out

bwebeq Thickness of the beam web

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons in the tension zone

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


rebar in the tension zone

fps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

fpu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-


age of all tendons in the tensile zone)

fpy Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of


all tendons in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

tslabeq Thickness of the composite slab

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2

φ Resistance factor for flexure

Flexure Design 7 - 17
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

7.3.2 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on approximate
stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural re-
lationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 0.85 fc′ over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located par-
allel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor
β1 is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete
strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi, β1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that β1 is not to be taken to be less than
0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD par-


agraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated only for bending about horizontal
axis 3. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The
capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone
as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located
in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined ten-
dons in a section, stressed or not, have fpe (effective stress after loses) larger
than 0.5 fpu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be consid-
ered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being reported
in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the flange
(slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

7.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:

 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 The β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on section fc′.

7 - 18 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

 f ′ − 28 
– If f ′c > 28 MPa, =
then β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 = 0.85.

 The tendon and rebar location, area and material are read. Only bonded ten-
dons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on what sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to re-
sist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression
stress block, and it is considered to resist a negative moment when it is locat-
ed outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression
stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section
and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c
from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicu-
lar to the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of the tendon areas, APS


– center of gravity of the tendons, dP
– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu

– constant k (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group the following values are determined:

– sum of tension rebar areas, As

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, ds

 Positive moment resistance – First it is assumed that the equivalent compres-


sion stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis

Flexure Design 7 - 19
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

and the compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD


eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4)

APS f PU + As f s
c=
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

The distance c is compared to the slab thickness. If the distance to the neutral
axis c is larger than the composite slab thickness, the distance c is re-
evaluated. For this calculation, the beam flange width and area are converted
to their equivalents in slab concrete by multiplying the beam flange width by
the modular ratio between the precast girder concrete and the slab concrete.
The web width in the equation for c is substituted for the effective converted
girder flange width. The distance c is recalculated in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APS f PU + As f s − 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

If the calculated value of c exceeds the sum of the deck thickness and the
equivalent precast girder flange thickness, the program assumes the neutral
axis is below the flange of the precast girder and recalculates c. The term
0.85 f ′c ( b − bw ) in the calculation is broken into two terms, one refers to the
contribution of the deck to the composite section flange and the second refers
to the contribution of the precast girder flange to the composite girder flange.

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.

– If the section is a T-section, then

7 - 20 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS fPS  d p − 1  + AS f y  ds − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 
else
 cβ   cβ 
=M n APS fPS  d p − 1  + AS f y  ds − 1 
 2   2 
 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr = ϕM n

 Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and
the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous, except


that calculation of positive moment resistance is not applicable.

7.3.4 Flexure Capacity Design Example

Figure 7-3 Flexure capacity design example deck section

Girder spacing: 9'-8"

Girder type: AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72 inches deep, 42-inch-wide top


flange, and 28-inch-wide bottom flange (AASHTO 28/72 Girders)

Concrete deck: 8 inches thick, haunch thickness assumed = 0

Flexure Design 7 - 21
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 7-4 Flexure capacity design example beam section

Materials

Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength, fc′ = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, Ec = 4,696 ksi
Deck slab = 4.0 ksi,
Deck slab elastic modulus, Es = 3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel yield strength, fy = 60 ksi
Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade 270
Strand area, Aps = 0.153 in2

7 - 22 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Steel yield strength, fpy = 243 ksi


Steel ultimate strength, fpu = 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, Ep = 28,500 ksi

Basic beam section properties

Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, Ag = 1,085 in2
Moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in4
N.A. to top, yt = 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, yb = 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2007 paragraph 4.6.2.6, the effec-


tive flange width of the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width.

For the interior beam, the bslab = 9'-8" = 116 in.

Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive moment
when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block and is con-
sidered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the bottom
fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located par-
allel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β1c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.

 For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of tendon areas


APTbottom =
44 × 0.153 =
6.732 in 2
Value reported by CSiBridge = 6.732 in2

– distance from center of gravity of tendons to extreme compression fiber


12 × 2 + 12 × 4 + 10 × 6 + 6 × 8 + 4 × 10
yPTbottom = ( 72 + 8 ) − = 75 in
12 + 12 + 10 + 6 + 4

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu = 270 kip


Value reported by CSiBridge = 270 kip

Flexure Design 7 - 23
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

– constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)


 f py   243 
k= 2  1.04 − = 2  1.04 − = 0.28
 f pu   270 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.28

β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on the composite slab f ′c

β1 shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete strength not exceeding 4.0 ksi. If
f ′c > 4 ksi, then β1 shall be reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi. Since fc′ = 4 ksi, β1 = 0.85.
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 0.85 (not reported)

 The distance c between neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4.

APTbottom × f pu
c=
f pu
0.85 × f ′c × β1 × bslab + k × APTbottom ×
yPTbottom
6.732 * 270
= 5.314 in
270
0.85 × 4 × 0.85 × 116 + 0.28 × 6.732 ×
75
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 5.314 in

 The distance c is compared to the composite slab thickness to determine if


the c needs to be re-evaluated to include the precast beam flange in the
equivalent compression block.

Since c = 5.314 in < 8 in, the c is valid.

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.

 c   5.314 
f ps = f pu  1 − k  = 270 ×  1 − 0.28 ×  = 264.64 ksi
 yPTbottom   75 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 264.643 ksi

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.

7 - 24 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Since the section is rectangular,

 cβ   5.314 × 0.85 
M n = APTbottom f ps  yPTbottom − 1 = 6.732 × 264.64 ×  75 − 
 2   2 
= 129593.17
= 12 10 799.4 kip-ft
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 107 99 kip-ft (not reported)

 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr =
φM n =
0.9 × 10 799.4 =
9719.5 kip-ft
Value reported by CSiBridge = 9719.5 kip-ft (116633.5 kip-in)

Flexure Design 7 - 25
Chapter 8
Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

This chapter describes the algorithms CSiBridge applies when designing steel
I-beam with composite slab superstructures in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Edition, Section 6.

8.1 Section Properties


8.1.1 Yield Moments
8.1.1.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive yield moment, My, is determined by the program in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section D6.2.2 using the following user-defined
input, which is part of the Design Request (see Chapter 4 for more information
about Design Request).

Mdnc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the factored permanent load applied
before the concrete deck has hardened or is made composite.

Mdc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the remainder of the factored perma-
nent load (applied to the composite section).

The program solves for MAD from the following equation,

8- 1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

M dnc M dc M AD
Fyt = + + (AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.2.2-1)
S NC SLT SST

and then calculates yield moment based on the following equation

M y = M dnc + M dc + M AD (AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.2.2-2)

where

SNC = Noncomposite section modulus (in.3)


SLT = Long-term composite section modulus (in.3)
SST = Short-term composite section modulus (in.3)

My is taken as the lesser value calculated for the compression flange, Myc, or the
tension flange, Myt. The positive My is calculated only once based on Mdnc and
Mdc demands specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted
that the My calculated in the procedure described here is used by the program
only to determine Mnpos for a compact section in positive bending in a continu-
ous span, where the nominal flexural resistance may be controlled by My in ac-
cordance with (AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq. 6.10.7.1.2-3).

M n ≤ 1.3 Rh M y

8.1.1.1.1 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the procedure described for positive
yield moment is followed, except that the composite section for both short-term
and long-term moments consists of the steel section and the longitudinal rein-
forcement within the tributary width of the concrete deck. Thus, SST and SLT are
the same value. Also, Myt is taken with respect to either the tension flange or
the longitudinal reinforcement, whichever yields first.

The negative My is calculated only once based on the Mdnc and Mdc demands
specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted that the My cal-
culated in the procedure described here is used by the program solely to deter-
mine the limiting slenderness ratio for a compact web corresponding to 2Dcp /tw
in (AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq. A6.2.1-2).

8-2 Section Properties


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

E
Fyc  Dcp 
=λ pw( Dcp ) ≤ λ rw 
2  (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-2)
 Mp   Dc 
 0.54 − 0.09 
 Rh M y 

and web plastification factors in (AASHTO LRFD 2008 eqs. A.6.2.2-4 and
A6.2.2-5).

  Rh M yc   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p Mp
R pc = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yc M yc
  Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A.6.2.2-4)

  Rh M yt   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p M p
R pt = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yt M yt
 
Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-5)

8.1.2 Plastic Moments


8.1.2.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive plastic moment, Mp, is calculated as the moment of the plastic
forces about the plastic neutral axis. Plastic forces in the steel portions of a
cross-section are calculated using the yield strengths of the flanges, the web,
and reinforcing steel, as appropriate. Plastic forces in the concrete portions of
the cross-section that are in compression are based on a rectangular stress block
with the magnitude of the compressive stress equal to 0.85 fc′. Concrete in ten-
sion is neglected. The position of the plastic neutral axis is determined by the
equilibrium condition that there is no net axial force. In calculating Mp for
positive moment, the contribution of the rebar in the deck is ignored.

The plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is determined by:

• Calculating the element forces and using them to determine if the plastic neu-
tral axis is in the web, top flange, or concrete deck

• Calculating the location of the plastic neutral axis within the element deter-
mined in the first step

Section Properties 8-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

• Calculating Mp.

Equations for the various potential locations of the plastic neutral axis (PNA)
are given in Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp


 D   P − Pc − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y   t + 1
 2  Pw 
Pt + P w ≥
I In Web Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pt dt ]
2
Pc + Ps + Prb + Pn =
M p
2D

 t   P + Pt − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y  c  w + 1
 2  Pc 
In Top Pt + P w + Pc ≥
II
Y + ( tc − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Pn dn + Prb d rb + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
c  2
Flange P 2
Ps + Prb + Pn =
M
2tc 
p

 P + Pw + Pt − Prt − Prb 
Concrete Pt + P w + Pc ≥ Y = ( ts )  c 
Deck  Ps 
III  crb 
Below   Ps + Prb + Pn  Y Ps 
2

Prb  t2  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]


 2t s 

Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥ Y = crb


IV Deck at  crb   Y 2 Ps 
Prb   Ps + Pn M=   + [ Prt drt + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 ts 
p
 2t s 

Concrete  P + Pc + Pw + Pt − Prt 
Deck Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥ Y = ( t s )  rb 
Above  Ps 
V  crt 
Prb and   Ps + Pn  Y 2 Ps 
Below  ts  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
Prt  2t s 

Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Pn ≥ Y = crt


VI Deck at  crt   Y 2 Ps 
Prt   Ps M=   + [ Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 ts 
p
 2t s 

8-4 Section Properties


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Table 8-1 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp


 P + Pc + Pw + Pt + Prt 
Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Prt < Y = ( t s )  rb 
Deck  Ps 
VII  crt 
Above   Ps  Y 2 Ps 
Prt  ts  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Next the section is checked for ductility requirement in accordance with equa-
tion 6.10.7.3. In checking the ductility per 6.10.7.3, the depth of the haunch is
neglected.

Dp ≤ 0.42Dt

where Dp is the distance from the top of the concrete deck to the neutral axis of
the composite section at the plastic moment, and Dt is the total depth of the
composite section. At the section where the ductility requirement is not satis-
fied, the plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is set to ze-
ro.

bs Arb Crt
Art
Prt
ts Ps Crb Y
Prb PNA
PNA
bc Pc
tc Y Y
Pw PNA
D tw
tt Pt
CASE I CASE II CASES III-VII
bt

Figure 8-1 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases -- Positive Flexure

8.1.2.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


The plastic moment of a composite section in negative flexure is calculated by
an analogous procedure. Equations for the two cases most likely to occur in

Section Properties 8-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

practice are given in Table 8-2. The plastic moment of a noncomposite section
is calculated by eliminating the terms pertaining to the concrete deck and longi-
tudinal reinforcement from the equations in Tables 8-1 and 8-2 for composite
sections.

Table 8-2 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Negative Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp

 D   P − Pt − Prt − Prb 
= Y   c + 1
 2  Pw 
I In Web Pc + Pw ≥ Pt + Prb + Pn
Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pt dt + Pd
l l]
2
=
M p
2D

 t   P − Pc − Prt − Prb 
= Y  l  w + 1
In Top  2  Pt 
II Pc + Pw + Pt ≥ Prb + Pn
Flange
Y + ( tl − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pw dw + Pc dc ]
Pt  2 2

=
M
2tl 
p

Art Arb
Prt
ts Prb
Pt PNA
bc Y
tt Y
Pw PNA
D tw

tc Pc
bc CASE I CASE II
CASE V

Figure 8-2 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases -- Negative Flexure


in which

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0.85 fc′ bsts
Prb = Fyrb Arb

8-6 Section Properties


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Pc = Fycbctc
Pw = Fyw Dtw
Pt = Fyt bttt

In the equations for Mp given in Tables 8-1 and 8-2, d is the distance from an
element force to the plastic neutral axis. Element forces act at (a) mid-thickness
for the flanges and the concrete deck, (b) mid-depth of the web, and (c) center
of reinforcement. All element forces, dimensions, and distances are taken as
positive. The conditions are checked in the order listed in Tables 8-1 and 8-2.

8.1.3 Section Classification and Factors


8.1.3.1 Compact or Non-Compact − Positive Flexure
The program determines if the section can be qualified as compact based on the
following criteria:

 the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,

 the web satisfies the requirement of AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article (6.10.2.1.1),

D
≤ 150
tw

 the section satisfies the web slenderness limit,

2 Dcp E
≤ 3.76 . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.2-1)
tw Fyc

The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded) con-
tinuous or horizontally curved.

8.1.3.2 Design in Accordance with Appendix A


The program determines if a section qualifies to be designed using Appendix A
of the AASHTO LRFD 2008 Edition based on the following criteria:

• the Design Request Parameter “Use Appendix A?” is set to Yes (see Chapter
4 for more information about setting parameters in the Design Request),

• the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,

Section Properties 8-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

• the web satisfies the noncompact slenderness limit,

2 Dc E
< 5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.3-1)
tw Fyc

• the flanges satisfy the following ratio,

I yc
≥ 0.3. (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.6.2.3-2)
I yt

The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded) con-
tinuous or horizontally curved.

8.1.3.3 Hybrid Factor Rh − Composite Section Positive Flexure


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a
higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0. Other-
wise the hybrid factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

Afn = bottom flange area

Dn = the distance from the elastic neutral axis of the cross-section to


the inside face of bottom flange

Fn = fy of the bottom flange

8.1.3.4 Hybrid Factor Rh − Composite Section Negative Flexure


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a
higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0. Other-
wise the hybrid factor is taken as:

8-8 Section Properties


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

Afn = Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to Dn.
If the top flange controls, then the area of longitudinal rebar in
the slab is included in calculating Afn.

Dn = The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the
cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sections
where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, this dis-
tance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on
the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs first.

Fn = fy of the controlling flange. When the top flange controls, then


Fn is equal to the largest of the minimum specified yield
strengths of the top flange or the longitudinal rebar in the slab.

8.1.3.5 Hybrid Factor Rh – Non Composite Section


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a
higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0. Other-
wise the hybrid factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

Section Properties 8-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Afn = Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to Dn.

Dn = The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the
cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sections
where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, this dis-
tance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on
the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs first.

Fn = fy of the controlling flange.

8.1.3.6 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb


When checking constructability in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.2.1 or for composite sections in positive flexure, the
Rb factor is taken as equal to 1.0. For composite sections in negative flexure,
the Rb factor is taken as:

 awc  2 Dc 
Rb =
1−   t − λrw  ≤ 1.0
 1200 + 300 awc  w 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2)

where

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2-4)
Fyc

2 Dc t w
awc = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2-5)
b fc t fc

When the user specifies the Design Request parameter “Do webs have longitu-
dinal stiffeners?” as yes, the Rb factor is set to 1.0 (see Chapter 4 for more in-
formation about specifying Design Request parameters).

8.1.3.7 Unbraced Length Lb and Section Transitions


The program assumes that the top flange is continuously braced for all Design
Requests, except for Constructability. For more information about flange lat-
eral bracing in a Constructability Design Request, see Section 8.6 of this man-
ual.

8 - 10 Section Properties
Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

The unbraced length Lb for the bottom flange is equal to the distance between
the nearest downstation and upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span
support as defined in the Bridge Object. Some of the diaphragm types available
in CSiBridge may not necessarily provide restraint to the bottom flange. The
program assumes that the following diaphragm qualifies as providing lateral
restraint to the bottom flange: single beam, all types of chords and braces ex-
cept V braces without bottom beams.

For unbraced lengths where the member is nonprismatic, the lateral torsional
buckling resistance of the compression flange at each section within the un-
braced length is taken as the smallest resistance within the unbraced length un-
der consideration and the moment gradient modifier Cb is taken as 1.0.

For unbraced lengths containing a transition to a smaller section at a distance


less than or equal to 20% of the unbraced length from a brace point, the lateral
torsional buckling resistance is determined assuming the transition to the
smaller section does not exist provided that the lateral moment of inertia of the
flange of the smaller section is equal to or larger than 0.5 times the correspond-
ing value in the larger section. The algorithm does not distinguish at which
brace point the moment demand is smaller and applies the exception at both
brace points. It is the responsibility of the user to pay special attention to the
section transition within the 20% of the unbraced length from the brace point
and to follow the guidelines in AASHTO LRFD C6.10.8.2.3.

For this algorithm to be effective, it is necessary to have bridge section cuts at


each nonprismatic girder-section transition. This can be assured by using the
local section cuts feature when updating the linked model to create additional
local section cuts for each girder of steel I-girder bridge sections. Such girder-
only section cuts will be created at changes in the steel I-girder section, at stag-
gered diaphragms (cross frames), and at splice locations wherever a full-width
section cut does not exist.

8.2 Demand Sets


Demand Set combos (at least one is required) are user-defined combinations
based on LRFD combinations (see Chapter 4 for more information about speci-
fying Demand Sets). The demands from all specified demand combos are en-
veloped and used to calculate D/C ratios. The way the demands are used de-
pends on if the design parameter "Use Stage Analysis?” is set to Yes or No.

Demand Sets 8 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

If “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” the program reads the stresses on beams and
slabs directly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the effects
of the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections, as
well as the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were captured by
using the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge.

Note that the Design Request for staged constructability check (Steel-I Comp
Construct Stgd) allows only Nonlinear Staged Construction load cases to be
used as Demand Sets.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” the program decomposes load cases present in
every demand set combo to three Bridge Design Action categories: non-
composite, composite long term, and composite short term. The program uses
the load case Bridge Design Action parameter to assign the load cases to the
appropriate categories. A default Bridge Design Action parameter is assigned
to a load case based on its Design Type. However, the parameter can be over-
written: click the Analysis > Load Cases > {Type} > New command to dis-
play the Load Case Data – {Type} form; click the Design button next to the
Load case type dropdown list; under the heading Bridge Design Action, select
the User Defined option and select a value from the list. The assigned Bridge
Designed Action values are handled by the program in the following manner:

Table 8-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category Used in


Specified by the User the Design Algorithm
Non-Composite Non-Composite
Long-Term Composite Long-Term Composite
Short-Term Composite Short-Term Composite
Staged Non-Composite
Other Non-Composite

8.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff


Evaluation of the flange stress, fbu, calculated without consideration of flange
lateral bending is dependent on setting the Design Request parameter “Use
Stage Analysis?”

8 - 12 Demand Sets
Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

If the “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” then

P M NC M LTC M STC
fbu = + + +
Acomp Ssteel SLTC SSTC

where MNC is the demand moment on the non-composite section, MLTC is the
demand moment on the long-term composite section, and MSTC is the demand
moment on the short-term composite section.

The short-term section modulus for positive moment is calculated by trans-


forming the concrete deck using the steel-to-concrete modular ratio. The modu-
lar ratio (n) is calculated as a decimal number expressed as n= Es/Ec and used
without rounding. The long-term section modulus for positive moment is cal-
culated using a modular ratio factored by n, where n is specified in the Design
Parameter as the “Modular ratio long-term multiplier.” The effect of compres-
sion reinforcement is ignored. For negative moment, the concrete deck is as-
sumed cracked and is not included in the section modulus calculations while
tension reinforcement is accounted for.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” then the fbu stresses on each flange are read di-
rectly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the effects of the
staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections, as well as
the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were captured by using
the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge.

In the Strength Design Check, the program verifies the sign of the stress in the
composite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes that the
entire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to
reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not
contribute to the resistance of the section. Flange stress ff , used in the Service
Design Check, is evaluated in the same manner as stress fbu, with one excep-
tion. When the Steel Service Design Request parameter “Does concrete slab re-
sist tension?” is set to Yes, the program uses section properties based on a
transformed section that assumes the concrete slab to be fully effective in both
tension and compression.

In the Constructability checks, the program proceeds based on the status of the
concrete slab. When no slab is present or the slab is non-composite, the fbu

Demand Sets 8 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

stresses on each flange are read directly from the section cut results. When the
slab status is composite, the program verifies the sign of the stress in the com-
posite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes that the en-
tire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to
reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not
contribute to the resistance of the section.

8.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress fl


The flange lateral bending stress fl is evaluated only when all of the following
conditions are met:

 “Steel Girders” has been selected for the deck section type (Components >
Superstructure Item > Deck Sections command) and the Girder Modeling
In Area Object Models – Model Girders Using Area Objects option is set to
“Yes” on the Define Bridge Section Data – Steel Girder form.

 The bridge object is modeled using Area Objects. This option can be set us-
ing the Bridge > Update command to display the “Update Bridge Structural
Model“ form; then select the Update as Area Object Model option.

 Set the Live Load Distribution to Girders method to “Use Forces Directly
from CSiBridge” on the Bridge Design Request – Superstructure – {Code}
form, which displays when the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design >
Design Requests command is used (see Chapter 3 for more information
about Live Load Distribution). Since there is no live load used in the Con-
structability design, request this setting does not apply in that case.

In all other cases, the flange lateral bending stress is set to zero. The fl stresses
on each flange are read directly from the section cut results.

8.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression


For composite sections in positive flexure, the depth of the web in compression
is computed using the following equation:

 fc 
=Dc   d − t fc ≥ 0 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 D6.3-1)
 fc + ft 

8 - 14 Demand Sets
Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Figure 8-3 Web in Compression – Positive Flexure


where

fc = Sum of the compression-flange stresses caused by the different loads, i.e.,


DC1, the permanent load acting on the noncomposite section; DC2, the
permanent load acting on the long-term composite section; DW, the wear-
ing surface load; and LL+IM; acting on their respective sections. fc is taken
as negative when the stress is in compression. Flange lateral bending is dis-
regarded in this calculation.

ft = Sum of the tension-flange stresses caused by the different loads. Flange lat-
eral bending is disregarded in this calculation.

For composite sections in negative flexure, Dc is computed for the section con-
sisting of the steel girder plus the longitudinal reinforcement, with the excep-
tion of the following. For composite sections in negative flexure at the Service
Design Check Request where the concrete deck is considered effective in ten-
sion for computing flexural stresses on the composite section (Design Parame-
ter “Does concrete slab resist tension?” = Yes), Dc is computed from AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Eq. D 6.3.1-1. For this case, the stresses fc and ft are switched, the
signs shown in the stress diagram are reversed, tfc is the thickness of the bottom
flange, and Dc instead extends from the neutral axis down to the top of the bot-
tom flange.

8.2.4 Moment Gradient Modifier Cb


When the design request parameter ‘Method for determining moment gradient
factor Cb’ is set to ‘Program Determined’, then for each demand set the stresses
defined in AASHTO LRFD section 6.10.8.2.3 fmid, f0,f1 and f2 at the unbraced
segment are determined by interpolation of demands at nearest section cuts.
The designer should be aware that live load moments at neighboring section
cuts within the unbraced segment are not necessarily controlled by the same

Demand Sets 8 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

load pattern and as a result the moment gradient calculation may be impacted.
The moment gradient modifier Cb is then calculated as:

• For unbraced cantilevers and for members where fmid/f2 > 1 or f2 = 0:

𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 = 1.0 (6.10.8.2.3-6)

• For all other cases:

𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓 2
𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏 = 1.75 − 1.05 � 1 � + 0.3 � 1 � ≤ 2.3 (6.10.8.2.3-7)
𝑓𝑓 2 𝑓𝑓
2

8.3 Strength Design Request


The Strength Design Check calculates at every section cut positive flexural
capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. It then compares the
capacities against the envelope of demands specified in the Design Request.

8.3.1 Flexure
8.3.1.1 Positive Flexure – Compact
The nominal flexural resistance of the section is evaluated as follows:

If Dp ≤ 0.1 Dt, then Mn = Mp; otherwise

 Dp 
=M n M p  1.07 − 0.7  (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.1.2-2)
 Dt 

In a continuous span, the nominal flexural resistance of the section is deter-


mined as

Mn ≤ 1.3RhMy

where Rh is a hybrid factor for the section in positive flexure.

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 Mu + 3 f1S xt f 
DoverC = max  , l 
 φ f Mn 0.6 Fyf
 

8 - 16 Strength Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

8.3.1.2 Positive Flexure – Non-Compact


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flange is taken as:

Fnc = RbRhFyc (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.2.2-1)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFyt (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.7.2.2-1)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 fbu + 3 f1 fbu f 
DoverC = max  , , l 
 φ f Fnt φ f Fnc 0.6 Fyf
 

8.3.1.3 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Article 6.10.8


The local buckling resistance of the compression flange Fnc(FLB) as specified in
AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.8.2.2 is taken as:

If λf ≤ λ pf, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.2-1)

Otherwise

  Fyr  λ f − λ pf 
Fnc = 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.2-2)
  Rh Fyc  λ rf − λ pf  

in which

b fc
λf = (6.10.8.2.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf =
0.38 (6.10.8.2.2-4)
Fyc

E
λ rf =0.56 (6.10.8.2.2-5)
Fyr

Strength Design Request 8 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Fyr = Compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal yielding within


the cross-section, including residual stress effects, but not includ-
ing compression-flange lateral bending, taken as the smaller of
0.7Fyc and Fyw, but not less than 0.5 Fyc.

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange Fnc(LTB) as


specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article (6.10.8.2.3) is taken as follows:

 If Lb ≤ Lp, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-1)

 If Lp < Lb ≤ Lr, then

  Fyr  Lb − L p 
Fnc= Cb 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc ≤ Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.3-2)
  Rh Fyc  Lr − L p  

 If Lb > Lr, then Fnc = Fcr ≤ RbRhFyc (6.10.8.2.3-3)

in which

E E
Lb = unbraced length, L p = 1.0rt , Lr = πrt
Fyc Fyr

Cb = moment gradient modifier

Cb Rb π2 E
Fcr = 2
(6.10.8.2.3-8)
 Lb 
 r 
 t 

b fc
rt = (6.10.8.2.3-9)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 + 
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as


the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:

Fnc = min  Fnc( FLB) , Fnc( LTB) 

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:

8 - 18 Strength Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

φ f Rh Fyf (6.10.8.1.3-1)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 fbu + 3 f1 fbu f 
DoverC = max  , , 1 
 φ f Fm φ f Rh Fyf 0.6 Fyc
 

8.3.1.4 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Appendix A6


Sections that satisfy the following requirement qualify as compact web sec-
tions:

2 Dcp
≤ λ pw( Dcp ) (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-2)
tw

where

E
Fyc  Dcp 
=
λ pw( Dcp ) 2
≤  (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-2)
 Mp   Dc 
 0.54 − 0.09 
 Rh M y 

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-3)
Fyc

Dc = depth of the web in compression in the elastic range

Dcp = depth of the web in compression at the plastic moment

Then web plastification factors are determined as

Mp
R pc = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-4)
M yc

Mp
R pt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.1-5)
M yt

Strength Design Request 8 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Sections that do not satisfy the requirement for compact web sections, but for
which the web slenderness satisfies the following requirement:

λ w < λ rw (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-1)

where

2D
λw = c (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-2)
tw

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-3)
Fyc

The web plastification factors are taken as:

  Rh M yc   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p Mp
R pc = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yc M yc
  Mp   λ tw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-4)

  Rh M yt   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p M p
R pt = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yt M yt
  Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-5)

where

 D 
λ pw( Dc ) = λ pw( Dc p )  c  ≤ λ rw (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.2.2-6)
 Dcp 

The local buckling resistance of the compression flange MncFLB as specified in


AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article A6.3.2 is taken as:

 If λ f ≤ λ pf , then M nc = R pc M yc (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-1)

  F S  λ − λ pf  
Otherwise M nc = 1 −  1 − yr xc  f   R pc M yc
  R pc M yc  λ rf − λ pf  
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-2)

8 - 20 Strength Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

in which

b fc
λf = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf =
0.38 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-4)
Fyc

Ekc
λ rf =0.95 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-5)
Fyr

4
For built-up sections, kc = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.2-6)
D
tw

For rolled shapes (eFramePropType =SECTION_I as defined in API function


SapObject.SapModel.PropFrame.GetNameList; PropType argument)

kc = 0.76

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange MncLTB as


specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article A6.3.3 is taken as Mnc = RpcMyc:

 If Lb ≥ L p , then M nc = R pc M yc . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-1)

 If L p < Lb ≤ Lr , then

  Fyr S xc  Lb − L p  
M nc= Cb 1 −  1 −    R pc M yc ≤ R pc M yc
  R pc M yc  Lr − L p  
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-2)

 If Lb > Lr , then=
M nc Fcr S xc ≤ R pc M yc (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-3)

in which

Lb = unbraced length,

Strength Design Request 8 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

E
L p = 1.0rt (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-4)
Fyc

2
E J  Fyr S xc h 
=Lr 1.95rt 1 + 1 + 6.76  
Fyr S xc h  E J 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-5)

Cb = moment gradient modifier

C bπ 2 E J
( Lb rt )
2
=Fcr 1 + 0.078 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-8)
( Lb rt )
2
S xc h

Dt w3 b fc t ft  t fc  b ft t 3ft  t ft 
3
J= +  1 − 0.63  +  1 − 0.63 
3 3  b fc  3  b ft 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-9)

b fc
rt = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 A6.3.3-10)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 + 
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as


the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:

M nc = min  M nc( FLB) , M nc( LTB) 

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:

φ f R pt M yt

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 Mu + 3 f1S xc Mu f 
DoverC = max  , , 1 
 φ f M nc φ f R pt M yt 0.6 Fyc
 

8 - 22 Strength Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

8.3.1.5 Net Section Fracture


All tension flanges are checked for net section fracture per AASHTO-2012 sec-
tion 6.10.1.8. The net area of the tension flange is evaluated as:

𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 = 𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔

where rspl is a ratio defined by the user in the splice definition (Bridge > Span
Items > Splices) command and Ag is the gross flange area. The demand over
capacity ratio is calculated as:
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝐴𝐴
(AASHTO 2012 6.10.1.8-1)
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 ;0.84 𝑛𝑛 𝑓𝑓𝑢𝑢 �
𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔

8.3.1.6 Shear Connectors


The program calculates the total nominal shear force Pnom as specified in
AASHTO 2012 Article 6.10.10.4.2. The user can use the Pnom value to deter-
mine the minimum number of shear connectors n as defined in AASHTO 2012
eq. 6.1.0.10.4.1-2.

2
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = �𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡2 + 𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟

where

𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡 = 𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 + 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛

𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�0.85𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ; 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �

𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�0.45𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ 𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ; 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �
𝐿𝐿𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = 𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡 (AASHTO 2012 6.10.10.4.2-1 to 9)
𝑅𝑅

Larch is calculated as 50% of the girder span length and R is the radius of the
girder.

8.3.2 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is

Strength Design Request 8 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request, the program
recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a Demand over Capacity
ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported in the result ta-
ble under the column heading d0req.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program re-
calculates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 6.10.9.1e. It should be noted that stiffeners
are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners
does not affect the magnitude of the demands.

8.3.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0.
tw Fyw

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-4)

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = .
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-5)

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  ,
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w

8 - 24 Strength Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-6)

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

8.3.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that:
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-3)

where
do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  d 
  1 +   + o 
  D D 

8.3.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

Vn = Vcr = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)

Strength Design Request 8 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC = .
φvVn

8.4 Service Design Request


The Service Design Check calculates at every section cut stresses ff at the top
steel flange of the composite section and the bottom steel flange of the compo-
site section and compares them against limits specified in AASHTO LRFD
2008 Section 6.10.4.2.2.

For the top steel flange of composite sections:

ff
DoverC = . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-1)
0.95 Rh Fyf

For the bottom steel flange of composite sections:

fl
ff +
DoverC = 2 . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-2)
0.95 Rh Fyf

For both steel flanges of noncomposite sections:

fl
ff +
DoverC = 2 . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.4.2.2-3)
0.80 Rh Fyf

The flange stresses are derived in the same way as fbu stress demands (see Sec-
tion 8.2.1 of this manual). The user has an option to specify if the concrete slab
resists tension or not by setting the “Does concrete slab resist tension?” Design
Request parameter. It is the responsibility of the user to verify if the slab quali-
fies, in accordance with “Does concrete slab resist tension?” Section 6.10.4.2.1,
to resist tension.

For compact composite sections in positive flexure used in shored construction,


the longitudinal compressive stress in the concrete deck, determined as speci-
fied in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.1.1.1d, is checked against 0.6 f ′c .

8 - 26 Service Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

DoverC = fdeck/0.6 f ′c

Except for composite sections in positive flexure in which the web satisfies the
requirement of AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.2.1.1, all section cuts are
checked against the following requirement:

fc
DoverC = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.2.2-4)
Fcrw

where:

fc = Compression-flange stress at the section under consideration due to de-


mand loads calculated without consideration of flange lateral bending.

Fcrw = Nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs without longitudinal stiffen-


ers determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article 6.10.1.9

0.9 Ek
Fcrw = 2
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-1)
D
t 
 w

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw/0.7. In which

k = bend buckling coefficient

9
k= (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-2)
( Dc D)
2

where

Dc = Depth of the web in compression in the elastic range determined as spec-


ified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Article D6.3.1.

When both edges of the web are in compression, k is taken as 7.2.

The highest Demand over Capacity ratio together with controlling equation is
reported for each section cut.

Service Design Request 8 - 27


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

8.5 Fatigue Design Request


8.5.1 Web Fatigue
Web Fatigue Design Request is used to calculate the Demand over Capacity ra-
tio as defined in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 6.10.5.3 – Special Fatigue Re-
quirement for Webs. The requirement is applicable to interior panels of webs
with transverse stiffeners. When processing the Design Request from the De-
sign module, the program assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present
and classifies all web panels as unstiffened. Therefore, when the Design Re-
quest is completed from the Design module, the Design Result Status table
shows the message text “No stiffeners defined – use optimization form to de-
fine stiffeners.”

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations, and then the program
can recalculate the Web Fatigue Request. In that case the program classifies the
web panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria
specified in AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 6.10.9.1. It should be noted that
stiffeners are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying
stiffeners does not affect the magnitude of the demands.

DoverC = Vu Vcr (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.5.3-1)

where

Vu = Shear in the web at the section under consideration due to demand speci-
fied in the Design Request demand set combos. If the live load distribu-
tion to girders method “Use Factor Specified by Design Code” is select-
ed in the Design Request, the program adjusts for the multiple presence
factor to account for the fact that fatigue load occupies only one lane
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 Section 3.6.1.4.3b) and multiple presence factors
shall not be applied when checking for the fatigue limit state (AASHTO
LRFD 2008 Section 3.6.1.1.2).

Vcr = Shear-buckling resistance determined from AASHTO LRFD 2008 eq.


6.10.9.3.3-1 (see Section 8.3.2.3 of this manual)

8 - 28 Fatigue Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

8.5.2 Flange Fatigue


For every demand set the top and bottom flange tensile stress range due to ver-
tical bending and bottom flange tensile stress range due to lateral bending are
calculated at every section cut. The tensile stress ranges can be used by the user
to verify AASHTO 2012 load induced fatigue criteria specified in Article
6.6.1.2.2.

The flange stresses are derived in the same was as fbu stress demands (see Sec-
tion 8.2.1 of this manual). The tensile stress range for a particular demand set is
calculated as the delta between maximum tensile stress and minimum tensile
stress. If the minimum stress is compressive and the maximum stress is tensile
the stress range is set equal to the maximum stress, whereas if both maximum
and minimum stresses are compressive the stress range is set equal to zero. If
the demand set does not contain an envelope of values, the stress range is also
set to zero.

8.6 Constructability Design Request


8.6.1 Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct Stgd)
This request enables the user to verify the superstructure during construction
using a Nonlinear Staged Construction load case. The use of nonlinear staged
analysis allows the user to define multiple snapshots of the structure during
construction where parts of the bridge deck may be at various completion stag-
es. The user can control which stages the program will include in the calcula-
tions of controlling demand over capacity ratios.

For each section cut specified in the Design Request, the constructability de-
sign check loops through the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case output
steps that correspond to Output Labels specified in the Demand Set. At each
step the program determines the status of the concrete slab at the girder section
cut. The slab status can be non present, present non-composite, or composite.

The Staged Constructability Design Check accepts Area Object models. The
Staged Constructability Design Check cannot be run on Solid or Spine models.

Constructability Design Request 8 - 29


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

8.6.2 Non-Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct NonStgd)


This request enables the user to verify Demand over Capacity ratios during
construction without the need to define and analyze a Nonlinear Staged Con-
struction load case. For each section cut specified in the Design Request the
Constructability Design Check loops through all combos specified in the De-
mand Set list. At each combo the program assumes the status of the concrete
slab as specified by the user in the Slab Status column. The slab status can be
non-composite or composite and applies to all the section cuts.

The Non-Staged Constructability Design Check accepts all Bridge Object


Structural Model Options available in the Update Bridge Structural Model
form (Bridge > Update > Structural Model Options option).

8.6.3 Slab Status vs. Unbraced Length


On the basis of the slab status, the program calculates corresponding positive
flexural capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. Next the pro-
gram compares the capacities against demands specified in the Demand Set by
calculating the Demand over Capacity ratio. The controlling Demand Set and
Output Label on a girder basis are reported for every section cut.

When the slab status is composite, the program assumes that the top flange is
continuously braced. When slab status in not present or non-composite, the
program treats both flanges as discretely braced. It should be noted that the
program does not verify the presence of diaphragms at a particular output step.
It assumes that anytime a steel beam is activated at a given section cut that the
unbraced length Lb for the bottom flange is equal to the distance between the
nearest downstation and the upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span ends
as defined in the Bridge Object. The program assumes the same Lb for the top
flange. In other words the unbraced length Lb is based on the cross diaphragms
that qualify as providing restraint to the bottom flange. Some of the diaphragm
types available in CSiBridge may not necessarily provide restraint to the top
flange. It is the user’s responsibility to provide top flange temporary bracing at
the diaphragm locations before slabs acting compositely.

8 - 30 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

8.6.4 Flexure
8.6.4.1 Positive Flexure Non Composite
The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
D  fbucomp + fltop fbucomp + 3 fltop fbucomp fbutens + flbot 
= max  , , , 
C  φ f Rh Fyctop φ f Fnctop φ f Fcrwtop φ f Rh Fytbot
 

where Fnctop is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced top
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual) and Fcrwtop is the nominal bend–buckling re-
sistance for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs
without longitudinal stiffeners.

0.9 Ek
Fcrw = 2
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.9.1-1)
D
t 
 w

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw /0.7

where

9
k= 2
 Dc 
 
 D

When both edges of the web are in compression, k = 7.2.

8.6.4.2 Positive Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 fbucomp fbucomp fbutens + flbot 


D C = max  , , 
 φ f Rh Fyctop φ f Fcrwtop φ f Rh Fytbot 

where Fcrwtop is nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs specified in


AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longitudinal stiffeners
(also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).

Constructability Design Request 8 - 31


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

8.6.4.3 Negative Flexure Non Composite


The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
 fbucomp + flbot fbucomp + 3 flbot fbucomp fbutens + fltop 
D C = max  , , , 
 φ f Rh Fycbot φ f Fncbot φ f Fcrwbot φ f Rh Fyttop
 

where Fncbot is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bottom
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual) and Fcrwbot is nominal bend-buckling resistance
for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without lon-
gitudinal stiffeners (also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).

8.6.4.4 Negative Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
 fbucomp + flbot fbucomp + 3 flbot fbucomp f f 
D C = max  , , , butens , deck 
 φ f Rh Fycbot φ f Fncbot φ f Fcrwbot φ f Rh Fyttop φt fr
 

where Fncbot is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bottom
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual), Fcrwbot is the nominal bend–buckling resistance
for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without lon-
gitudinal stiffeners (also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual), and fdeck is the de-
mand tensile stress in the deck and fr is the modulus of rupture of concrete as
determined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.4.2.6.

8.6.5 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is
not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request and the con-
trolling D over C ratio is occurring at a step when the slab status is composite,
the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a Demand
over Capacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported
in the result table under the column heading d0req.

8 - 32 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations and then the program
can recalculate the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web
panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria spec-
ified in section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not
modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does
not affect the magnitude of the demands. Adding stiffeners also does not in-
crease capacity of sections cuts where the concrete slab status is other than
composite.

8.6.5.1 Non Composite Sections


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVP (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)

The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

8.6.5.2 Composite Section

8.6.5.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

Constructability Design Request 8 - 33


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = .
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-5)

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  ,
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-6)

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

8.6.5.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel, with the section at the
section cut proportioned such that
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5, (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

8 - 34 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 8 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  do 
  1 +   + 
  D D 

8.6.5.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVP (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

8.7 Section Optimization


After at least one Steel Design Request has been successfully processed,
CSiBridge enables the user to open a Steel Section Optimization module. The
Optimization module allows interactive modification of steel plate sizes and
definition of vertical stiffeners along each girder and span. It recalculates re-
sistance “on the fly” based on the modified section without the need to unlock
the model and rerun the analysis. It should be noted that in the optimization
process the demands are not recalculated and are based on the current
CSiBridge analysis results.

The Optimization form allows simultaneous display of three versions of section


sizes and associated resistance results. The section plate size versions are “As
Analyzed,” “As Designed,” and “Current.” The section plots use distinct colors
for each version – black for As Analyzed, blue for As Designed, and red for
Current. When the Optimization form is initially opened, all three versions are
identical and equal to “As Analyzed.”

Two graphs are available to display various forces, moments, stresses, and rati-
os for the As Analyzed or As Designed versions. The values plotted can be

Section Optimization 8 - 35
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

controlled by clicking the “Select Series to Plot” button. The As Analyzed se-
ries are plotted as solid lines and the As Designed series as dashed lines.

To modify steel plate sizes or vertical stiffeners, a new form can be displayed
by clicking on the Modify Section button. After the section modification is
completed, the Current version is shown in red in the elevation and cross sec-
tion views. After the resistance has been recalculated successfully by clicking
the Recalculate Resistance button, the Current version is designated to As De-
signed and displayed in blue.

After the section optimization has been completed, the As Designed plate sizes
and materials can be applied to the analysis bridge object by clicking the OK
button. The button opens a new form that can be used to Unlock the existing
model (in that case all analysis results will be deleted) or save the file under a
new name (New File button). Clicking the Exit button does not apply the new
plate sizes to the bridge object and keeps the model locked. The As Designed
version of the plate sizes will be available the next time the form is opened, and
the Current version is discarded.

8 - 36 Section Optimization
Chapter 9
Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

This chapter describes the algorithms CSiBridge applies when designing steel
U-tub with composite slab superstructures in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD.

9.1 Section Properties


9.1.1 Yield Moments
9.1.1.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive yield moment, My, is determined by the program in accordance
with section D6.2.2 of the code using the following user-defined input, which
is part of the Design Request (see Chapter 4 for more information about Design
Request).

Mdnc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the factored permanent load applied
before the concrete deck has hardened or is made composite.

Mdc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the remainder of the factored perma-
nent load (applied to the composite section).

The program solves for MAD from the following equation,

9- 1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

M dnc M dc M AD
Fyt = + + (D6.2.2-1)
S NC SLT SST

and then calculates yield moment based on the following equation


M y = M dnc + M dc + M AD (D6.2.2-2)

where

SNC = Noncomposite section modulus (in.3)


SLT = Long-term composite section modulus (in.3)
SST = Short-term composite section modulus (in.3)

My is taken as the lesser value calculated for the compression flange, Myc, or the
tension flange, Myt. The positive My is calculated only once based on Mdnc and
Mdc demands specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted
that the My calculated in the procedure described here is used by the program
only to determine Mnpos for compact sections in positive bending in a continu-
ous span, where the nominal flexural resistance may be controlled by My in ac-
cordance with (eq. 6.10.7.1.2-3).

M n ≤ 1.3 Rh M y

9.1.1.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the procedure described for positive
yield moment is followed, except that the composite section for both short-term
and long-term moments consists of the steel section and the longitudinal rein-
forcement within the tributary width of the concrete deck. Thus, SST and SLT are
the same value. Also, Myt is taken with respect to either the tension flange or
the longitudinal reinforcement, whichever yields first. The negative My is cal-
culated only once based on the Mdnc and Mdc demands specified by the user in
the Design Request.

9.1.2 Plastic Moments


9.1.2.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive plastic moment, Mp, is calculated as the moment of the plastic
forces about the plastic neutral axis. Plastic forces in the steel portions of a

9-2 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

cross-section are calculated using the yield strengths of the flanges, the web,
and reinforcing steel, as appropriate. Plastic forces in the concrete portions of
the cross-section that are in compression are based on a rectangular stress block
with the magnitude of the compressive stress equal to 0.85 fc′. Concrete in ten-
sion is neglected. The position of the plastic neutral axis is determined by the
equilibrium condition, where there is no net axial force. In calculating Mp for
positive moment, the contribution of the rebar in the deck is ignored.

The plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is determined by:

• Calculating the effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

• Calculating the element forces and using them to determine if the plastic neu-
tral axis is in the web, top flange, or concrete deck;

• Calculating the location of the plastic neutral axis within the element deter-
mined in the first step;

and

• Calculating Mp.

Equations for the various potential locations of the plastic neutral axis (PNA)
are given in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp


 D   P − Pc − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y   t + 1
Pt + Pw ≥ Pc + Ps + Prb +  2  Pw 
I In Web
Pn Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pt dt ]
2
=
M p
2D

 t   P + Pt − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y  c  w + 1
In Top Pt + Pw + Pc ≥ Ps + Prb +  2  Pc 
II
Flanges Pn
Y + ( tc − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Pn dn + Prb d rb + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
Pc  2 2
=
M
2t c 
p

Section Properties 9-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 9-1 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp


 P + Pw + Pt − Prt − Prb 
Concrete Y = ( ts )  c 
Deck c   Ps 
III Pt + Pw + Pc ≥  rb  Ps + Prb + Pn
Below  t2   Y 2 Ps 
Prb M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Concrete Y = crb
c 
IV Deck at Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥  rb  Ps + Pn  Y 2 Ps 
Prb  ts  M=
p   + [ Prt drt + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Concrete  P + Pc + Pw + Pt − Prt 
Deck Y = ( t s )  rb 
Above c   Ps 
V Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥  rt  Ps + Pn
Prb and  ts   Y Ps 
2

Below M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]


Prt  2t s 

Concrete Y = crt
c 
VI Deck at Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Pn ≥  rt  Ps  Y 2 Ps 
Prt  ts  M=
p   + [ Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

 P + Pc + Pw + Pt + Prt 
Concrete Y = ( t s )  rb 
Deck c   Ps 
VII Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Prt <  rt  Ps
Above  ts   Y 2 Ps 
Prt M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

9-4 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Arb Crt
Art
Prt
Ps Crb Y
Prb PNA PNA
Pc Y
Y
Pw PNA

Pt
CASE I CASE II CASES III -VII

Figure 9-1 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases – Positive Flexure

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0.85 fc′ bsts
Prb = Fyrb Arb
Pc = 2 Fycbctc
Pw = (2 Fyw Dtw)/cos αweb
Pt = Fyt bttt where bt is effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

Next the section is checked for ductility requirement in accordance with equa-
tion 6.10.7.3. In checking the ductility per 6.10.7.3, the depth of the haunch is
neglected.
Dp ≤ 0.42Dt
where,

Dp is the distance from the top of the concrete deck to the neutral axis of the
composite section at the plastic moment.

Dt is the total depth of the composite section.

At the section where the ductility requirement is not satisfied, the plastic mo-
ment of a composite section in positive flexure is set to zero.

9.1.2.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


The plastic moment of a composite section in negative flexure is calculated by
an analogous procedure. Equations for the two cases most likely to occur in

Section Properties 9-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

practice are given in Table 9-2. The plastic moment of a noncomposite section
is calculated by eliminating the terms pertaining to the concrete deck and longi-
tudinal reinforcement from the equations for composite sections.

Table 9-2 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Negative Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp

 D   P − Pt − Prt − Prb 
= Y   c + 1
 2  Pw 
I In Web Pc + Pw ≥ Pt + Prb + Pn
Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pt dt + Pd
l l]
2
=
M p
2D

 t   P − Pc − Prt − Prb 
= Y  l  w + 1
In Top  
2 P 
Pc + Pw + Pt ≥ Prb + Pn
t
II
Flange
Y + ( tl − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pw dw + Pc dc ]
Pt  2 2
=
M
2tl 
p

Art Arb
Prt
Prb
Pt PNA
Y Y
Pw PNA

Pc
CASE I CASE II

Figure 9-2 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases – Negative Flexure

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0
Prb = Fyrb Arb
Pc = Fycbctc where bc is effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

9-6 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Pw = (2Fyw Dtw)/cos αweb


Pt = 2Fyt bttt

In the equations for Mp, d is the distance from an element force to the plastic
neutral axis. Element forces act at (a) mid-thickness for the flanges and the
concrete deck, (b) mid-depth of the web, and (c) center of reinforcement. All
element forces, dimensions, and distances are taken as positive. The conditions
are checked in the order listed.

9.1.3 Section Classification and Factors


9.1.3.1 Compact or Non-Compact - Positive Flexure
The program determines if the section can be qualified as compact based on the
following criteria:

• the bridge is not horizontally curved

• the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,

• the web satisfies the requirement of Article (6.11.2.1.2),

D
≤ 150
tw

• the section satisfies requirements of 6.11.2.3

• the box flange is fully effective as specified in 6.11.1.1

• the section satisfies web slenderness limit

2 Dcp E
≤ 3.76 . (6.11.6.2.2-1)
tw Fyc

The user can control in the design request parameters how the program shall
determine if the bridge is straight or horizontally. If the “Determined by pro-
gram” option is selected the algorithm checks for radius of the layout line at
every valid section cut. If the radius is a definite number the bridge is classified
as horizontally curved.

Section Properties 9-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.1.3.2 Hybrid Factor Rh – Positive Flexure


For homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a higher-strength
steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0. Otherwise the hybrid
factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3 ρ − ρ 3 )
Rh = (6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2 β

where

2 Dn t w
β= (6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

ρ = the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

Afn = bottom flange area.

Dn = the larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the cross-
section to the inside face of either flange. For sections where the neu-
tral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, Dn is the distance from the
neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on the side of the neutral
axis where yielding occurs first.

Fn = fy of the bottom flange.

9.1.3.3 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb – Positive Flexure


For composite sections in positive flexure, the Rb factor is taken as equal to 1.0.

9.1.3.4 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb – Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the Rb factor is taken as:

 awc  2 Dc 
Rb =
1− 
+  t − λrw  ≤ 1.0 (6.10.1.10.2)
 1200 300 awc   w 

where

E
λrw = 5.7 (6.10.1.10.2-4)
Fyc

9-8 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

2 Dc t w
awc = (6.10.1.10.2-5)
b fc t fc

When the user specifies the design request parameter “Do webs have longitu-
dinal stiffeners?” as yes, the Rb factor is set to 1.0 (see Chapter 4 for more in-
formation about specifying Design Request parameters).

9.2 Demand Sets


Demand Set combos (at least one required) are user-defined combination based
on LRFD combinations (see Chapter 4 for more information about specifying
Demand Sets). The demands from all specified demand combos are enveloped
and used to calculate D/C ratios. The way the demands are used depends on if
the parameter "Use Stage Analysis?” is set to Yes or No.

If “Yes,” the program reads the stresses on beams and slabs directly from the
section cut results. The program assumes that the effects of the staging of loads
applied to non-composite versus composite section and the concrete slab mate-
rial time dependent properties were captured by using the nonlinear stage anal-
ysis load case available in CSiBridge.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” the program decomposes load cases present in
every demand set combo to three Bridge Design Action categories: non-
composite, composite long term, and composite short term. The program uses
the load case Bridge Design Action parameter to assign the load cases to the
appropriate categories. A default Bridge Design Action parameter is assigned
to a load case based on its Design Type. However, the parameter can be
overwritten: click the Analysis > Load Cases > {Type} > New command to
display the Load Case Data – {Type} form; click the Design button next to the
Load case type drop down list, under the heading Bridge Design Action select
the User Defined option and select a value from the list. The assigned Bridge
Designed Action values are handled by the program in the following manner:

Table 9-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category


specified by the user used in the design algorithm
Non-Composite Non-Composite

Demand Sets 9-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 9-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category


specified by the user used in the design algorithm
Long-Term Composite Long-Term Composite
Short-Term Composite Short-Term Composite
Staged Non-Composite
Other Non-Composite

9.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff


Evaluation of the flange stress, fbu, calculated without consideration of flange
lateral bending is dependent on setting the “Use Stage Analysis?” design re-
quest parameter.

If the “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” then

P M NC M LTC M STC
fbu = + + +
Acomp Ssteel SLTC SSTC

where,

MNC is the demand moment on the noncomposite section.

MLTC is the demand moment on the long-term composite section.

MSTC is the demand moment on the short-term composite section.

The short term section modulus for positive moment is calculated by trans-
forming the concrete deck using steel to concrete modular ratio. The modular
ratio (n) is calculated as a decimal number expressed as n=Es/Ec and used
without rounding. The long term section modulus for positive moment is using
a modular ratio factored by n, where n is specified in the “Modular ratio long
term multiplier” Design Parameter. The effect of compression reinforcement is
ignored. For negative moment, the concrete deck is assumed cracked and is not
included in the section modulus calculations, whereas tension reinforcement is
taken into account.

9 - 10 Demand Sets
Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

The effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1. is used to calculate the
stresses. However when design request parameter “Use Stage Analysis? =
Yes,” then the fbu stresses on both top and bottom flanges are read directly from
the section cut results. In that case the stresses are calculated based on gross
section; the use of effective section properties cannot be accommodated with
this option. Therefore, if the section bottom flange does not satisfy criteria of
6.11.1.1 as being fully effective, the design parameter "Use Stage Analysis?”
should be set to No.

When “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” the program assumes that the effects of
the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections and
the concrete slab material time dependent properties were captured by using the
Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge. The “Modular
ratio long-term multiplier.” is not used in this case.

The program verifies the sign of the stress in the composite slab, and if stress is
positive (tension), the program assumes that the entire section cut demand
moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to reflect the fact that the
concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not contribute to the re-
sistance of the section.

Flange stress ff used in the Service design check is evaluated in the same man-
ner as the stress fbu, with one exception. When the Design Parameter “Does
concrete slab resist tension?” in the Steel Service Design request is set to
“Yes,” the program uses section properties based on a transformed section as-
suming the concrete slab to be fully effective in both tension and compression.

9.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress fl


The top flange lateral bending stress fl is evaluated only for constructability de-
sign check when slab status is ‘non-composite” and when all of the following
conditions are met:

 “Steel Girders” has been selected for the deck section type (Components >
Superstructure Item > Deck Sections command) and the Girder Modeling
In Area Object Models – Model Girders Using Area Objects option is set to
“Yes” on the Define Bridge Section Data – Steel Girder form.

Demand Sets 9 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 The bridge object is modeled using Area Objects. This option can be set us-
ing the Bridge > Update command to display the “Update Bridge Structural
Model“ form; then select the Update as Area Object Model option.

In all other cases, the top flange lateral bending stress is set to zero. The fl
stresses on each top flange are read directly from the section cut results and the
maximum absolute value stress from the two top flanges is reported.

9.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression


For composite sections in positive flexure, the depth of web in compression is
computed using the following equation:

 − fc 
=Dc   d − t fc ≥ 0 (D6.3.1-1)
 fc + ft 

Figure 9-3 Web in Compression – Positive Flexure

where,

fc = sum of the compression-flange stresses caused by the different loads, i.e.,


DC1, the permanent load acting on the noncomposite section; DC2, the
permanent load acting on the long-term composite section; DW, the wear-
ing surface load; and LL+IM acting on their respective sections. fc is tak-
en as negative when the stress is in compression. Flange lateral bending
is disregarded in this calculation.

9 - 12 Demand Sets
Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

ft = the sum of the tension-flange stresses caused by the different loads.


Flange lateral bending is disregarded in this calculation.

For composite sections in negative flexure, DC is computed for the section con-
sisting of the steel U-tub plus the longitudinal reinforcement, with the excep-
tion of the following. For composite sections in negative flexure at the Service
Design Check Request where the concrete deck is considered effective in ten-
sion for computing flexural stresses on the composite section (Design Parame-
ter “Does concrete slab resist tension?” = Yes), DC is computed from (eq. D
6.3.1-1). For this case, the stresses fc and ft are switched, the signs shown in the
stress diagram are reversed, tfc is the thickness of the bottom flange, and DC in-
stead extends from the neutral axis down to the top of the bottom flange.

9.3 Strength Design Request


The strength design check calculates at every section cut positive flexural ca-
pacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. It then compares the ca-
pacities against the envelope of demands specified in the design request.

9.3.1 Flexure
9.3.1.1 Positive Flexure – Compact
The nominal flexural resistance of the section is evaluated as follows:

If Dp ≤ 0.1 Dt, then Mn = Mp, otherwise

 Dp 
=M n M p  1.07 − 0.7  (6.10.7.1.2-2)
 Dt 

In a continuous span the nominal flexural resistance of the section is deter-


mined as

Mn ≤ 1.3RhMy

where Rh is a hybrid factor for the section in positive flexure.

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =
∅𝑓𝑓 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛

Strength Design Request 9 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.3.1.2 Positive Flexure – Non-Compact


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flanges is taken as:

Fnc = RbRhFyc (6.11.7.2.1-1)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFytΔ (6.10.7.2.1-2)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

9.3.1.3 Negative Flexure


Nominal flexural resistance of continuously braced top flange in tension is tak-
en as:

Fnt = RhFyt (6.11.8.3)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom unstiffened compression flange is


taken as:

𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 2
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �1 − � � (6.11.8.2.2-1)
𝜙𝜙𝑣𝑣 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

In which:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = nominal axial compression buckling resistance of the flange un-


der compression alone calculated as follows:

9 - 14 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , then:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 Δ (6.11.8.2.2-2)

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 , then:

Δ−0.3 λ −λ
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �Δ − �Δ − � � f p �� (6.11.8.2.2-3)
Rh λr −λp

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 , then:

0.9𝐸𝐸𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑘𝑘
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = (6.11.8.2.2-4)
𝜆𝜆2𝑓𝑓

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = nominal shear buckling resistance of the flange under shear alone
calculated as follows:

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘
• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 1.12� 𝐹𝐹 𝑠𝑠 , then:
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.58𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (6.11.8.2.2-5)

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
• If 1.12� < 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 1.40� , then:
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

0.65�𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓
(6.11.8.2.2-6)

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 > 1.40� , then:
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

0.9𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝜆𝜆2𝑓𝑓
(6.11.8.2.2-7)

𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 = slenderness ratio for the compression flange

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
= 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
(6.11.8.2.2-8)

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 = 0.57� (6.11.8.2.2-9)
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 Δ

Strength Design Request 9 - 15


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 = 0.95� (6.11.8.2.2-10)
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

2
𝑓𝑓
Δ = �1 − 3 �𝐹𝐹 𝑣𝑣 � (6.11.8.2.2-11)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the factored
loads at the section under consideration (ksi)
𝑇𝑇
= (6.11.8.2.2-12)
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = smaller of the compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal


yielding, with consideration of residual stress effects, or the
specified minimum yield strength of the web (ksi)

= (Δ − 0.3)𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (6.11.8.2.2-13)

k = plate-buckling coefficient for uniform normal stress

= 4.0

ks = plate-buckling coefficient for shear stress

= 5.34

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

9.3.2 Shear
When processing the design request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that no vertical stiffeners are present and classifies all web panels as un-
stiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is not suf-
ficient to resist the demand specified in the design request, the program rec-
ommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a demand over capacity ratio
equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported in the result table
under the column heading d0req.

9 - 16 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations and the program recal-
culates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web panels
as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified in
Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not modeled
in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not affect
the magnitude of the demands.

9.3.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = . (6.10.9.3.2-5)
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw

Strength Design Request 9 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  , (6.10.9.3.2-6)
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

9.3.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.3.2-3)

where
do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  do 
  1 +  D  + D 
  

9.3.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVp (6.10.9.3.3-1)

9 - 18 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

9.3.2.4 Torsion Effects


For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =
∅𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛

9.4 Service Design Request


The service design check calculates at every section cut stresses ff at top steel
flange of composite section, bottom steel flange of composite section and com-
pares them against limits specified in Section 6.10.4.2.2 of the code.

For the top and bottom steel flange of composite sections:


𝑓𝑓
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 0.95𝑅𝑅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹 (6.10.4.2.2-2)
ℎ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

The flange stresses are derived in the same way as fbu stress demands (see Sec-
tion 9.2 of this manual). The user has an option to specify whether concrete
slab resists tension or not by setting the design request parameter “Does con-
crete slab resist tension?”. It is the responsibility of the user to verify if the slab
qualifies per Section 6.10.4.2.1 of the code to resist tension.

Service Design Request 9 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

For compact composite sections in positive flexure utilized in shored construc-


tion, the longitudinal compressive stress in the concrete deck, determined as
specified in Article 6.10.1.1.1d, is checked against 0.6f′c.

DoverC = fdeck/0.6f’c

Except for composite sections in positive flexure in which the web satisfies the
requirement of Article 6.10.2.1.1, all section cuts are shall checked against the
following requirement:

𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐
DoverC = (6.10.4.2.2-4)
𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where:

fc - compression-flange stress at the section under consideration due to demand


loads calculated without consideration of flange lateral bending

Fcrw - nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs without longitudinal stiffeners


determined as specified in Article 6.10.1.9
0.9𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-1)
� �
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw/0.7. In which

k=bend buckling coefficient


9
𝑘𝑘 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-2)
� 𝑐𝑐 �
𝐷𝐷

where Dc= depth of the web in compression in the elastic range determined as
specified in Article D6.3.1 of the code.

When both edges of the web are in compression, k is taken as 7.2.

The highest demand over capacity ratio together with controlling equation is
reported for each section cut.

9.5 Web Fatigue Design Request


Web Fatigue Design Request is used to calculate the demand over capacity ra-
tio as defined in Section 6.10.5.3 of the code – Special Fatigue Requirement for

9 - 20 Web Fatigue Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Webs. The requirement is applicable to interior panels of webs with transverse


stiffeners. When processing the design request from the Design module, the
program assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all
web panels as unstiffened. Therefore when the design request is completed
from the Design module the Design Result Status table shows message text –
“No stiffeners defined – use optimization form to define stiffeners”.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Optimize


command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program recalcu-
lates the Web Fatigue Request. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not mod-
eled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not
affect the magnitude of the demands.

In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

If live load distribution to girders method “Use Factor Specified by Design


Code” is selected in the design request the program adjusts for the multiple
presence factor to account for the fact that fatigue load occupies only one lane

Web Fatigue Design Request 9 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

(code Section 3.6.1.4.3b) and multiple presence factors shall not be applied
when checking for fatigue limit state (code Section 3.6.1.1.2).

Vcr = shear-buckling resistance determined from eq. 6.10.9.3.3-1 (see Section


9.3.2.3 of this manual)

DoverC=Vui/Vcr (6.10.5.3-1)

9.6 Constructability Design Request


9.6.1 Staged (Steel-U Comp Construct Stgd)
This request enables the user to verify the superstructure during construction
by utilizing the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case. The use of nonlinear
staged analysis allows the user to define multiple snapshots of the structure
during construction where parts of the bridge deck may be at various comple-
tion stages. The user has a control of which stages the program will include in
the calculations of controlling demand over capacity ratios.

For each section cut specified in the design request the constructability design
check loops through the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case output steps
that correspond to Output Labels specified in the Demand Set. At each step the
program determines the status of the concrete slab at the girder section cut. The
slab status can be non-composite or composite.

The Staged Constructability design check accepts the following Bridge Object
Structural Model Options:
- Area Object Model
- Solid Object Model
The Staged Constructability design check cannot be run on Spine models.

9.6.2 Non-staged (Steel-U Comp Construct NonStgd)


This request enables the user to verify demand over capacity ratios during con-
struction without the need to define and analyze Nonlinear Staged Construction
load case. For each section cut specified in the design request the constructabil-
ity design check loops through all combos specified in the Demand Set list. At
each combo the program assumes the status of the concrete slab as specified by
the user in the Slab Status column. The slab status can be non-composite or
composite and applies to all the section cuts.

9 - 22 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

The Non-Staged Constructability design check accepts all Bridge Object Struc-
tural Model Options available in Update Bridge Structural Model form.
(Bridge > Update > Structural Model Options option)

9.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length


Based on the slab status the program calculates corresponding positive flexural
capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. Next the program
compares the capacities against demands specified in the Demand Set by calcu-
lating the demand over capacity ratio. The controlling Demand Set and Output
Label on girder basis are reported for every section cut.

When slab status is composite the program assumes that both top and bottom
flanges are continuously braced. When slab status in not present or non-
composite the program treats both top flanges as discretely braced. It should be
noted that the program does not verify presence of diaphragms at a particular
output step. It assumes that anytime a steel beam is activated at a given section
cut that the unbraced length Lb for the top flanges is equal to distance between
the nearest downstation and upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span ends
as defined in the Bridge Object. In other words the unbraced length Lb is based
on the cross diaphragms that qualify as providing restraint to the bottom flange.
Some of the diaphragm types available in CSiBridge may not necessarily pro-
vide restraint to the top flanges. It is the user responsibility to provide top
flanges temporary bracing at the diaphragm locations prior to the slab acting
compositely.

9.6.4 Flexure
9.6.4.1 Positive Flexure Non Composite
The local buckling resistance of the top compression flange Fnc(FLB) as specified
in Article 6.10.8.2.2 is taken as:

If λf ≤ λ pf, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.2-1)

Otherwise

  Fyr  λ f − λ pf  
Fnc = 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.2-2)
  Rh Fyc  λrf − λ pf  

in which

Constructability Design Request 9 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

b fc
λf = (6.10.8.2.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf = 0.38 (6.10.8.2.2-4)
Fyc

E
λrf = 0.56 (6.10.8.2.2-5)
Fyr

Fyr = compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal yielding


within the cross-section, including residual stress effects, but
not including compression-flange lateral bending, taken as the
smaller of 0.7Fyc and Fyw, but not less than 0.5 Fyc

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the top compression flange Fnc(LTB)
as specified in Article (6.10.8.2.3) is taken as follows:

If Lb ≤ Lp, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-1)

If Lp < Lb ≤ Lr, then

  Fyr  Lb − L p 
Fnc= Cb 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc ≤ Rb Rh Fyc . (6.10.8.2.3-2)
  Rh Fyc  Lr − L p  

If Lb > Lr, then Fnc = Fcr ≤ RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-3)

in which

E E
= =
Lb unbraced =
length, L p 1.0 rt , Lr π rt
Fyc Fyr

Cb = 1 (moment gradient modifier)

Cb Rbπ 2 E
Fcr = 2
(6.10.8.2.3-8)
 Lb 
 r 
 t 

9 - 24 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

b fc
rt = (6.10.8.2.3-9)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 + 
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flange is taken as the
smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling re-
sistance:

Fnc = min  Fnc( FLB) , Fnc( LTB) 

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFytΔ (6.10.7.2.1-2)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


1
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 3 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , , , , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 0.6 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

Where Fcrwtop is nominal bend–bucking resistance for webs specified in


AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longitudinal stiffeners.
0.9𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-1)
� �
𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw /0.7


9
where 𝑘𝑘 = 𝐷𝐷 2
. When both edges of the web are in compression then k=7.2
� 𝑐𝑐 �
𝐷𝐷

Constructability Design Request 9 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.6.4.2 Positive Flexure Composite


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flanges is taken as:

Fnctop= RhFycΔ (6.11.3.2.-3)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fntbot = RhFytΔ (6.11.3.2.-3)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

9.6.4.3 Negative Flexure Non Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙


𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 0.6 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

9 - 26 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Where Fnctbot is nominal flexural resistance of the continuously braced unstiff-


ened bottom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article
6.11.8.2.2-1 (also see Section 9.3.1.3 of this manual).

9.6.4.4 Negative Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑


𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝛥𝛥 𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 𝑓𝑓𝑟𝑟

Where Fnctbot is nominal flexural resistance of the continuously braced unstiff-


ened bottom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article
6.11.8.2.2-1 (also see Section 9.3.1.3 of this manual), and

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section and fdeck is de-
mand tensile stress in the deck and fr is modulus of rupture of concrete as de-
termined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.4.2.6

9.6.5 Shear
When processing the design request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is
not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the design request and the con-
trolling demand over capacity ratio is occurring at step when the slab status is
composite, the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a
demand over apacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is re-
ported in the result table under the column heading d0req.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program re-
calculates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not mod-

Constructability Design Request 9 - 27


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

eled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not
affect the magnitude of the demands. Adding stiffeners also does not increase
capacity of sections cuts where concrete slab status is other then composite.

In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

9.6.5.1 Torsion Effects


For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

9.6.5.2 Non Composite Sections


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 = 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑝𝑝 (6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

9 - 28 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

9.6.5.3 Composite Sections

9.6.5.3.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = . (6.10.9.3.2-5)
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  , (6.10.9.3.2-6)
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

9.6.5.3.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that:
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

Constructability Design Request 9 - 29


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  d 
  1 +   + o 
  D D 

9.6.5.3.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 = 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐶𝐶𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 (6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

9.7 Section Optimization


After at least one Steel Design Request has been successfully processed,
CSiBridge enables the user to open a Steel Section Optimization module. The
Optimization module allows interactive modification of certain steel plate siz-
es, materials, and definition of vertical stiffeners along each girder and span.
The U tub section plate parameters that are available for modification are:

Top flange – thickness, width and material

9 - 30 Section Optimization
Chapter 9 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Webs –thickness, material

Bottom flange – thickness, material

The program recalculates resistance “on the fly” based on the modified section
without the need to unlock the model and rerun the analysis. It should be noted
that in the optimization process the demands are not recalculated and are based
on the current CSiBridge analysis results.

The Optimization form allows simultaneous display of three versions of sec-


tion sizes and associated resistance results. The section plate size versions are
“As Analyzed,” “As Designed,” and “Current.” The section plots use distinct
colors for each version – black for As Analyzed, blue for As Designed, and red
for Current. When the Optimization form is initially opened, all three versions
are identical and equal to “As Analyzed.”

Two graphs are available to display various forces, moments, stresses, and ra-
tios for the As Analyzed or As Designed versions. The values plotted can be
controlled by clicking the “Select Series to Plot” button. The As Analyzed se-
ries are plotted as solid lines and the As Designed series as dashed lines.

To modify steel plate sizes or vertical stiffeners, a new form can be displayed
by clicking on the Modify Section button. After the section modification is
completed, the Current version is shown in red in the elevation and cross sec-
tion views. After the resistance has been recalculated successfully by clicking
the Recalculate Resistance button, the Current version is designated to As De-
signed and displayed in blue.

After the section optimization has been completed, the As Designed plate sizes
and materials can be applied to the analysis bridge object by clicking the OK
button. The button opens a new form that can be used to Unlock the existing
model (in that case all analysis results will be deleted) or save the file under a
new name (New File button). Clicking the Exit button does not apply the new
plate sizes to the bridge object and keeps the model locked. The As Designed
version of the plate sizes will be available the next time the form is opened, and
the Current version is discarded.

The previously defined stiffeners can be recalled in the Steel Beam Section
Variation form by clicking the Copy/Reset/Recall button in the top menu of

Section Optimization 9 - 31
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

the form. The form can be displayed by clicking on the Modify Section but-
ton.

9 - 32 Section Optimization
Chapter 10
Run a Bridge Design Request

This chapter identifies the steps involved in running a Bridge Design Request.
(Chapter 4 explains how to define the Request.) Running the Request applies
the following to the specified Bridge Object:

 Program defaults in accordance with the selected codethe Preferences

 Type of design to be performedthe check type (Section 4.2.1)

 Portion of the bridge to be designedthe station ranges (Section 4.1.3)

 Overwrites of the Preferencesthe Design Request parameters (Section


4.1.4)

 Load combinationsthe demand sets (Chapter 2)

 Live Load Distribution factors, where applicable (Chapter 3)

For this example, the AASHTO LRFD 2007 code is applied to the model of a
concrete box-girder bridge shown in Figure 10-1.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with the steps that are necessary to create
a CSiBridge model of a concrete box girder bridge. If additional assistance is
needed to create the model, a 30-minute Watch and Learn video entitled,
”Bridge – Bridge Information Modeler” is available at the CSI website

10 - 1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

www.csiamerica.com. The tutorial video guides the user through the creation
of the bridge model referenced in this chapter.

Figure 10-1 3D view of example concrete box girder bridge model

10.1 Description of Example Model


The example bridge is a two-span prestressed concrete box girder bridge with
the following features:

Abutments: The abutments are skewed by 15 degrees and connected to the


bottom of the box girder only.

Prestress: The concrete box girder bridge is prestressed with four 10-in2
tendons (one in each girder) and a jacking force of 2160 kips per tendon.

Bents: The one interior bent has three 5-foot-square columns.

Deck: The concrete box girder has a nominal depth of 5 feet. The deck has
a parabolic variation in depth from 5 feet at the abutments to a maximum
of 10 feet at the interior bent support.

Spans: The two spans are each approximately 100 feet long.

Figure 10-2 Elevation view of example bridge

10 - 2 Description of Example Model


Chapter 10 - Run a Bridge Design Request

Figure 10-3 Plan view of the example bridge

10.2 Design Preferences


Use the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Preferences command to
select the AASHTO LRFD 2007 design code. The Bridge Design Preferences
form shown in Figure 10-4 displays.

Figure 10-4 Bridge Design Preferences form

10.3 Load Combinations


For this example, the default design load combinations were activated using the
Design/Rating > Load Combinations > Add Defaults command. After the
Bridge Design option has been selected, the Code-Generated Load Combina-
tions for Bridge Design form shown in Figure 10-5 displays. The form is used

Design Preferences 10 - 3
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

to specify the desired limit states. Only the Strength II limit state was selected
for this example. Normally, several limit states would be selected.

Figure 10-5 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design form

The defined load combinations for this example are shown in Figure 10-6.

Figure 10-6 Define Load Combinations form

10 - 4 Load Combinations
Chapter 10 - Run a Bridge Design Request

The Str-II1, Str-II2 and StrIIGroup1 designations for the load combinations are
specified by the program and indicate that the limit state for the combinations
is Strength Level II.

10.4 Bridge Design Request


After the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Design Request com-
mand has been used, the Bridge Design Request form shown in Figure 10-7
displays.

Figure 10- 7 Define Load Combinations form

The name given to this example Design Request is FLEX_1, the Check Type
is for Concrete Box Flexure and the Demand Set, DSet1, specifies the combi-
nation as StrII (Strength Level II).

Bridge Design Request 10 - 5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The only Design Request Parameter option for a Concrete Box Flexural check
type is for PhiC. A value of 0.9 for PhiC is used.

10.5 Start Design/Check of the Bridge


After an analysis has been run, the bridge model is ready for a design/check.
Use the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Run Super command to
start the design process. Select the design to be run using the Perform Bridge
Design form shown in Figure 10-8:

Figure 10-8 Perform Bridge Design - Superstructure

The user may select the desired Design Request(s) and click on the Design
Now button. A plot of the bridge model, similar to that shown in Figure 10-9,
will display.

If several Design Requests


have been run, the individ-
ual Design Requests can be
selected from the Design
Check options drop-down
list. This plot is described
further in Chapter 11.

Figure 10-9 Plot of flexure


check results

10 - 6 Start Design/Check of the Bridge


Chapter 11
Display Bridge Design Results

Bridge design results can be displayed on screen and as printed output. The
on-screen display can depict the bridge response graphically as a plot or in data
tables. The Advanced Report Writer can be used to create the printed output,
which can include the graphical display as well as the database tables.

This chapter displays the results for the example used in Chapter 10. The model
is a concrete box girder bridge and the code applied is AASHTO LRFD 2007.
Creation of the model is shown in a 30-minute Watch and Learn video on the
CSI website, www.csiamerica.com.

11.1 Display Results as a Plot


To view the forces, stresses, and design results graphically, click the Home >
Display > Show Bridge Superstructure Design Results command, which will
display the Bridge Object Response Display form shown in Figure 11-1.

The plot shows the design results for the FLEX_1 Design Request created using
the process described in the preceding chapters. The demand moments are en-
veloped and shown in the blue region, and the negative capacity moments are
shown with a brown line. If the demand moments do not exceed the capacity
moments, the superstructure may be deemed adequate in response to the flexure
Design Request. Move the mouse pointer onto the demand or capacity plot to
view the values for each nodal point. Move the pointer to the capacity moment

Display Results as a Plot 11 - 1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

at station 1200 and 536981.722 kip-in is shown. A verification calculation that


shows agreement with this CSiBridge result is provided in Section 11.4.

Figure 11-1 Plot of flexure check results for the example bridge design model

11.1.1 Additional Display Examples


Use the Home > Display > Show Bridge Forces/Stresses command to select,
on the example form shown in Figure 11-2, the location along the top or bottom
portions of a beam or slab for which stresses are to be displayed. Figures 11-3
through 11-9 illustrate the left, middle, and right portions as they apply to Mul-
ticell Concrete Box Sections. Location 1, as an example, refers to the top left se-
lection option while location 5 would refer to the bottom center selection option.
Locations 1, 2, and 3 refer to the top left, top center, and top right selection op-
tion while locations 4, 5, and 6 refer to the bottom left, bottom center, and bot-
tom right selection options.

11 - 2 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 11 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 11-2 Select the location on the beam or slab for which results are to be displayed

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the web Centerline of the web

Figure 11-3 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Vertical

Display Results as a Plot 11- 3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

Bottom slab cut line 4

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the web
Centerline of the web

Figure 11-4 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6

Centerline of the web Centerline of the web

Figure 11-5 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Clipped

11 - 4 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 11 - Display Bridge Design Results

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6

Centerline of the web Centerline of the web

Figure 11-6 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders and Radius

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

Bottom slab cut line


4, 5
6 4
5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the web Centerline of the web
Centerline of the web

Figure 11-7 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped Max

Display Results as a Plot 11- 5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6

Centerline of the web Centerline of the web

Figure 11-8 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - Advanced

1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6

Centerline of the web

Figure 11-9 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - AASHTO - PCI - ASBI Standard

11 - 6 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 11 - Display Bridge Design Results

11.2 Display Data Tables


To view design results on screen in tables, click the Home > Display > Show
Tables command, which will display the Choose Tables for Display form
shown in Figure 11-10. Use the options on that form to select which data results
are to be viewed. Multiple selections may be made.

Figure 11-10 Choose Tables for Display form

When all selections have been made, click the OK button and a database table
similar to that shown in Figure 11-11 will display. Note the drop-down list in
the upper right-hand corner of the table. That drop-down list will include the
various data tables that match the selections made on the Choose Tables for
Display form. Select from that list to change to a different database table.

Display Data Tables 11- 7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 11-11 Design database table for AASHTO LRFD 2007 flexure check

The scroll bar along the bottom of the form can be used to scroll to the right to
view additional data columns.

11.3 Advanced Report Writer


The File > Report > Create Report command is a single button click output
option but it may not be suitable for bridge structures because of the size of the
document that is generated. Instead, the Advanced Report Writer feature within
CSiBridge is a simple and easy way to produce a custom output report.

To create a custom report that includes input and output, first export the files us-
ing one of the File > Export commands: Access; Excel; or Text. When this
command is executed, a form similar to that shown in Figure 11-12 displays.

11 - 8 Advanced Report Writer


Chapter 11 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 11-12 Choose Tables for Export to Access form

This important step allows control over the size of the report to be generated.
Export only those tables to be included in the final report. However, it is possi-
ble to export larger quantities of data and then use the Advanced Report Writer
to select only specific data sets for individual reports, thus creating multiple
smaller reports. For this example, only the Bridge Data (input) and Concrete
Box Flexure design (output) are exported.

After the data tables have been exported and saved to an appropriate location,
click the File > Report > Advanced Report Writer command to display a
form similar to that show in Figure 11-13. Click the appropriate button (e.g.,
Find existing DB File, Convert Excel File, Convert Text File) and locate the ex-
ported data tables. The tables within that Database, Excel, or Text file will be
listed in the List of Tables in Current Database File display box.

Advanced Report Writer 11- 9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 11-13 Create Custom Report form

Select the tables to be included in the report from that display box. The selected
items will then display in the Items Included in Report display box. Use the var-
ious options on the form to control the order in which the selected tables appear
in the report as well as the headers (i.e., Section names), page breaks, pictures,
and blanks required for final output in .rft, .txt, or .html format.

After the tables have been selected and the headers, pictures, and other format-
ting items have been addressed, click the Create Report button to generate the
report. The program will request a filename and the path to be used to store the
report. Figure 11-14 shows an example of the printed output generated by the
Report Writer.

11 - 10 Advanced Report Writer


Chapter 11 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 11-14 An example of the printed output

11.4 Verification
As a verification check of the design results, the output at station 1200 is exam-
ined. The following output for negative bending has been pulled from the
ConBoxFlexure data table, a portion of which is shown in Figure 11-10:

Demand moment, “DemandMax” (kip-in) = −245973.481


Resisting moment, “ResistingNeg” (kip-in) = 536981.722
Total area of prestressing steel, “AreaPTTop” (in2) = 20.0
Top k factor, “kFactorTop” = 0.2644444
Neutral axis depth, c, “CDistForNeg” (in) = 5.1286
Effective stress in prestressing, fps, “EqFpsForNeg” (kip/in2) = 266.7879

A hand calculation that verifies the results follows:

 For top k factor, from (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2),

 f   245.1 
k = 2  1.04 − PY  = 2  1.04 − = 0.26444 (Results match)
 fPU   270 

Verification 11- 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 For neutral axis depth, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4),

c=
( )
APT fPU − 0.85 f ′c bslab − bwebeq tslabeq
, for a T-section
fPU
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPT
YPT
APT fPU
c= , when not a T-section
fPU
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPT
YPT
20.0(270)
c = 5.1286 (Results match)
 270 
0.85(4)(0.85)(360) + 0.26444(20)  
 114 

 For effective stress in prestressing, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1),

 c   5.1286 
fPS = fPU  1 − k  =270  1 − 0.26444 =266.788 (Results match)
 YPT   144 

 For resisting moment, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1),

 cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M N APT f PS  YPT − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bSLAB − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= 
 2   2 2 

 cβ 
=M N APT f PS  YPT − 1  , when the box section is not a T-section
 2 
 5.1286(0.85) 
=
M N 20.0(266.788)  144 − =  596646.5 kip-in
 2 
M R φ=
= = 536981.8 kip-in (Results match)
M N 0.85(596646.5)

The preceding calculations are a check of the flexure design output. Other de-
sign results for concrete box stress, concrete box shear, and concrete box princi-
pal have not been included. The user is encouraged to perform a similar check
of these designs and to review Chapters 5, 6, and 7 for detailed descriptions of
the design algorithms.

11 - 12 Verification
Bibliography

ACI, 2007. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-08)
and Commentary (ACI 318R-08), American Concrete Institute, P.O.
Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan.

AASHTO, 2007. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications — Customary


U.S. Units, 4th Edition, 2008 Interim Revision, American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 444 North Capitol
Street, NW, Suite 249, Washington, D.C. 20001.

AASHTO, 2009. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge


Design. American Association of Highway and Transportation Offi-
cials, 444 North Capital Street, NW Suite 249, Washington, DC 20001.

AASHTO 2012. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications — U.S.


Units, 6th Edition, American Association of State High way and
Transportation Officials, 2012.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 2006. Canadian Highway Bridge De-


sign Code. Canadian Standards Association, 5060 Spectrum Way,
Suite 100, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada, L4W 5N6. November.

EN 1994-2:2005, Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete struc-


tures, Part 2: Composite Bridges, European Committee for Standardi-
zation, Management Centre: rue de Stassart, 36 B-1050 Brussels.

Bibliography - 1
SAFE Reinforced Concrete Design

Indian Roads Congress (IRC), May 2010: Standard Specifications and Code of
Practice for Road Bridges, Section V, Steel Road Bridges. Kama Koti
Marg, Sector 6, RK Puram, New Delhi- 110 022.

R-2

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen